Install Manual

Hybrid IP-PBX
Installation Manual
Model
KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX, KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200.

Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: Version 1.1
SD Logo is
a trademark.
System Components
System Components Table for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
Model
Shelves
KX-TDA100
Basic Shelf
KX-TDA200
Basic Shelf
Main Processing Card

MPR Option Card
Trunk Cards
Extension Cards
Installation Manual
Description
Main Processing Card (MPR)

KX-TDA0105
Memory Expansion Card (MEC)
KX-TDA0196
Remote Card (RMT)
KX-TDA0180
8-Port Analogue Trunk Card (LCOT8)
KX-TDA0181
KX-TDA0182
8-Port DID Card (DID8)
KX-TDA0183
KX-TDA0184
8-Port E & M Trunk Card (E&M8)
KX-TDA0187
T-1 Trunk Card (T1)
KX-TDA0188
E-1 Trunk Card (E1)
KX-TDA0189
8-Port Caller ID/Pay Tone Card (CID/PAY8)
KX-TDA0193
8-Port Caller ID Card (CID8)
KX-TDA0284
4-Port BRI Card (BRI4)
KX-TDA0288
KX-TDA0290CE/CJ
PRI Card (PRI30)
KX-TDA0290
PRI Card (PRI23)
KX-TDA0480
4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card (IP-GW4)
KX-TDA0484
4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card (IP-GW4E)
KX-TDA0143
4 Cell Station Interface Card (CSIF4)
KX-TDA0144
KX-TDA0170
8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card (DHLC8)
KX-TDA0171
8-Port Digital Extension Card (DLC8)
KX-TDA0172
KX-TDA0173
8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card (SLC8)
KX-TDA0174
KX-TDA0175
16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message

Lamp Card (MSLC16)

Model
Other Cards
Power Supply Units

(PSUs)
Cell Stations (CSs)
Description
KX-TDA0161
4-Port Doorphone Card (DPH4)
KX-TDA0162
2-Port Doorphone Card (German Type) (DPH2)
KX-TDA0166
16-Channel Echo Canceller Card (ECHO16)
KX-TDA0190
Optional 3-Slot Base Card (OPB3)
KX-TDA0191
4-Channel Message Card (MSG4)
KX-TDA0410
CTI Link Card (CTI-LINK)
KX-TDA0103
L-Type Power Supply Unit (PSU-L)
KX-TDA0104
M-Type Power Supply Unit (PSU-M)
KX-TDA0108
S-Type Power Supply Unit (PSU-S)
KX-TDA0141CE
2-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a DHLC/DLC Card

(PT-interface CS) for DECT Portable Station
KX-TDA0141
2-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a DHLC/DLC Card

(PT-interface CS) for 2.4 GHz Portable Station
KX-TDA0142CE
4-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a CSIF Card for DECT

Portable Station
KX-TDA0142
3-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a CSIF Card for 2.4

GHz Portable Station
Proprietary Equipment KX-A228
S/M-type Back-up Battery Cable
KX-A229
L-type Back-up Battery Cable
KX-A258
Blank Slot Cover
KX-T30865
Doorphone
System Components Table for KX-TDA30

Model
Description
Main Unit
KX-TDA30
Main Unit
Trunk Cards
KX-TDA3180
KX-TDA3183
KX-TDA3193
4-Port Caller ID Card (CID4)
KX-TDA3280
KX-TDA3480
4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card (IP-GW4)
KX-TDA3171
KX-TDA3172
KX-TDA3173
KX-TDA3174
Extension Cards
Installation Manual

Model
Other Cards
Cell Stations (CSs)
Description
KX-TDA3105
KX-TDA3161
4-Port Doorphone Card (DPH4)
KX-TDA3162
2-Port Doorphone Card (German Type) (DPH2)
KX-TDA3166
8-Channel Echo Canceller Card (ECHO8)
KX-TDA3168
Extension Caller ID Card (EXT-CID)
KX-TDA3191
2-Channel Message Card (MSG2)
KX-TDA3196
Remote Card (RMT)
KX-TDA0141CE
2-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a Super Hybrid Port or

a DLC Card for DECT Portable Station
KX-TDA0141
2-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a Super Hybrid Port or

a DLC Card for 2.4 GHz Portable Station
Proprietary Equipment KX-A236
Additional AC Adaptor
KX-A228
S/M-type Back-up Battery Cable
KX-T30865
Doorphone
Available Proprietary Telephones

The Hybrid IP-PBX supports all of the Panasonic KX-T7000, KX-TD7000, and KX-TCA series:
Digital/Analogue proprietary telephones (e.g., KX-T7625, KX-T7630, KX-T7633, KXT7636)
Portable stations (e.g., KX-TD7590, KX-TD7690, KX-TCA155, KX-TCA255)
DSS consoles (e.g., KX-T7640)
Single line telephones (e.g., KX-T7710)
Note
The Hybrid IP-PBX does not support the following telephones:
KX-T30800 series Proprietary Telephones and DSS consoles
KX-TD7500 DECT Portable Station

For the equipment (e.g., Add-on Key Module, USB Module, Headset*1) that can be connected
to a particular telephone, refer to the telephone's manual.
For other equipment that can be connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX, refer to "1.2.2 System
Connection Diagram".
Abbreviations in this manual
Proprietary telephone: PT
*1
The KX-T7090 headset can be connected to the KX-T7000, KX-T7200, KX-T7300, KX-T7400, and KX-T7500 (except for KXT7560/KX-T7565) series telephones.
Installation Manual
Digital proprietary telephone: DPT

Analogue proprietary telephone: APT
Portable station: PS
Single line telephone: SLT
Notice
There are some optional service cards and features that are not available for certain
countries/areas. Consult your certified Panasonic dealer for detailed instructions.
The power supply capacity of the Hybrid IP-PBX may differ from the values described
in this manual depending on the model number. Please consult your dealer for
detailed information.
The KX-TDA100CN and KX-TDA200CN have a power supply unit (PSU-S and PSUM, respectively) pre-installed.
Installation Manual
Important Safety Instructions

SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to
reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
1. Read and understand all instructions.

2. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.
3. Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or
aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
4. Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink,
or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.
5. Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product may fall,
causing serious damage to the product.
6. Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are provided for ventilation; to
protect it from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings
should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar
surface. This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or other heat source.
This product should not be placed in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is
provided.
7. This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the
product label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your
dealer or local power company.
8. This product is equipped with a 3-wire earthing type plug, a plug having a third (earthing)
pin. This plug will only fit into an earthing type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you
are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your
obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the earthing type plug.
9. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord
will be abused by people walking on it.
10. Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or
electric shock.
11. Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electric
shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.
12. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble this product, but take it to a
qualified person when some service or repair work is required. Opening or removing
covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect reassembly can
cause electric shock when the appliance is subsequently used.
13. Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:
a)
b)
c)
d)
When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.

If liquid has been spilled into the product.
If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust
only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions because improper
adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive
work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.
e) If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
Installation Manual
f)
If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance.
14. Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may
be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
15. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
Installation Manual
Precaution
Keep the unit away from heating appliances and electrical noise generating devices such
as fluorescent lamps, motors and televisions. These noise sources can interfere with the
performance of the Hybrid IP-PBX.
This unit should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40 C) and
vibration, and should not be exposed to direct sunlight.
Never attempt to insert wires, pins, etc. into the vents or other holes of this unit.
If there is any trouble, disconnect the unit from the telephone line. Plug an SLT into the
telephone line. If the telephone operates properly, do not reconnect the unit to the line until
the trouble has been repaired by an authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre. If the
telephone does not operate properly, chances are that the trouble is in the telephone
network, and not in the Hybrid IP-PBX.
Do not use benzene, thinner, or the like, or any abrasive powder to clean the cabinet. Wipe
it with a soft cloth.
For users in Germany only
When the unit is working, the noise is less than 70 dB (A) according to DIN 45635 Part 19.
For users in Finland, Norway and Sweden only (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
This unit may only be installed in a room or space with restricted access, and equipotential
bonding must be applied. For information on earthing, refer to "2.2.5 Frame Earth
Connection".
For users in New Zealand only
This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom '111' Emergency
Service.
The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom
has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its
network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any
sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all
respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor
does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services.
This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the
higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should
difficulties arise in such circumstances.
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are
dependent on the equipment (PBX) associated with this modem. In order to operate within
the limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications, the associated PBX equipment
shall be sent to ensure that modem calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of
receipt of ringing.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Under power failure conditions, the wireless telephones may not operate. Please ensure
that a separate telephone, not dependent on local power, is available for emergency use
in emergencies.
For users in Australia only
No External TRC Terminal is provided due to an Internal Link between PE and TRC.
Installation Manual
WARNING
THIS UNIT MAY ONLY BE INSTALLED AND SERVICED BY QUALIFIED

SERVICE PERSONNEL.
WHEN A FAILURE OCCURS WHICH EXPOSES ANY INTERNAL PARTS,
DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD IMMEDIATELY AND RETURN
THIS UNIT TO YOUR DEALER.
DISCONNECT THE TELECOM CONNECTION BEFORE
DISCONNECTING THE POWER CONNECTION PRIOR TO RELOCATING
THE EQUIPMENT, AND RECONNECT THE POWER FIRST.
THIS UNIT IS EQUIPPED WITH AN EARTHING CONTACT PLUG. FOR
SAFETY REASONS THIS PLUG MUST ONLY BE CONNECTED TO AN
EARTHING CONTACT SOCKET WHICH HAS BEEN INSTALLED
ACCORDING TO REGULATIONS.
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
THE POWER SUPPLY CORD IS USED AS THE MAIN DISCONNECT
DEVICE. ENSURE THAT THE SOCKET-OUTLET IS LOCATED/
INSTALLED NEAR THE EQUIPMENT AND IS EASILY ACCESSIBLE.
CAUTION
DANGER OF EXPLOSION EXISTS IF THE BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED.
REPLACE THE BATTERY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED
BY THE BATTERY MANUFACTURER. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING
TO THE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS.
The serial number of this product may be found on the label affixed to the
side of the unit. You should note the model number and the serial number
of this unit in the space provided and retain this book as a permanent
record of your purchase to aid in identification in the event of theft.
MODEL No.:
SERIAL No.:
Installation Manual
For your future reference

DATE OF PURCHASE
NAME OF DEALER
DEALER'S ADDRESS
DEALER'S TEL. NO.
The KX-TDA30E, the KX-TDA30NE, the KX-TDA30GR, and the KX-TDA30CE are
designed to interwork with the:
Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of a European country
Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN basic rate access
The KX-TDA100E/KX-TDA200E, the KX-TDA100NE/KX-TDA200NE, the KXTDA100GR/KX-TDA200GR, and the KX-TDA100CE/KX-TDA200CE are designed to
interwork with the:
Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of a European country
Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN basic rate access
Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN primary rate
access
ONP 2048 kbit/s digital structured leased lines (D2048S)
We, Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd./Panasonic Communications Company (U.K.) Ltd., declare
that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of
Directive 1999/5/EC.
If you would like to receive a copy of the original Declaration of Conformity of our products which
relates to the R&TTE, please visit our web address:
http://doc.panasonic-tc.de
10
Installation Manual
Introduction
This Installation Manual is designed to serve as an overall technical reference for the
Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX, KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200. It provides instructions for
installing the hardware, and programming the Hybrid IP-PBX using the KX-TDA30
Maintenance Console (for KX-TDA30) or the KX-TDA Maintenance Console (for KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200).
The Structure of this Manual

This manual contains the following sections:
Section 1 System Outline KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
Provides general information on the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200, including the system
capacity and specifications.
Section 2 Installation KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
Describes the procedures to install the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200. Detailed instructions for
planning the installation site, installing the shelves and optional service cards, and cabling
of peripheral equipment are provided. Further information on system expansion and
peripheral equipment installation is included.
Section 3 Guide for the KX-TDA Maintenance Console KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
Explains the installation procedure, structure, and basic information of the KX-TDA
Maintenance Console.
Section 4 Troubleshooting KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
Provides information on the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 and telephone troubleshooting.
Section 5 System Outline KX-TDA30
Provides general information on the KX-TDA30, including the system capacity and
specifications.
Section 6 Installation KX-TDA30
Describes the procedures to install the KX-TDA30. Detailed instructions for planning the
installation site, installing the optional service cards, and cabling of peripheral equipment
are provided. Further information on system expansion and peripheral equipment
installation is included.
Section 7 Guide for the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console KX-TDA30
Explains the installation procedure, structure, and basic information of the KX-TDA30
Maintenance Console.
Section 8 Troubleshooting KX-TDA30
Provides information on the KX-TDA30 and telephone troubleshooting.
About the Other Manuals

Along with this Installation Manual, the following manuals are available:
Feature Guide
Describes all basic, optional and programmable features of the Hybrid IP-PBX, and stepby-step instruction for performing system programming using a proprietary telephone or a
personal computer (PC).
User Manual
Provides operating instructions for end users using a PT, SLT, PS, or DSS Console.
Installation Manual
11
Trademarks
12
Installation Manual
Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its
subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.
All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
Screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
Precautions for Users in the United Kingdom

FOR YOUR SAFETY, PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY.
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and
convenience. A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, please
ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI
to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark
or the BSI mark
on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is
replaced. If you lose the fuse cover, the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is
obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your local Panasonic Dealer.
IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE FOR THE SOCKET OUTLET IN YOUR
PREMISES, THEN THE FUSE SHOULD BE REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF AND
DISPOSED OF SAFELY. THERE IS A DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE
CUT OFF PLUG IS INSERTED INTO ANY 13 AMP SOCKET.
If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below. If in any doubt,
please consult a qualified electrician.
WARNING
THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.
IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains leads are coloured in accordance with the following
code:
Green-and-yellow: Earth
Blue: Neutral
Brown: Live
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the
coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows.
The wire that is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug
that is marked with the letter E or by the safety earth symbol
or coloured GREEN or
GREEN-AND-YELLOW.
The wire that is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal that is marked with the letter
N or coloured BLACK.
The wire that is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal that is marked with the
letter L or coloured RED.
Installation Manual
13
How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse
and fuse cover.
This equipment should be used on PSTN lines requiring 2-wire Loop calling unguarded
clearing with Loop Disconnect or DTMF address signalling.
The equipment must be connected to direct exchange lines and a payphone should not be
connected as an extension.
999 and 112 can be dialled on the apparatus after accessing the Exchange line for the purpose
of making outgoing calls to the BT emergency (999) and (112) service.
During dialling, this apparatus may tinkle the bells of other telephones using the same line. This
is not a fault and we advise you not to call the Fault Repair Service.
14
Installation Manual
Table of Contents
<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>
1
System Outline KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ................................ 21
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.3
1.3.1
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
System Highlights KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ....................................................22

System Highlights ....................................................................................................22
Basic System Construction KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200.....................................24
Basic Shelf ...............................................................................................................24
System Connection Diagram ...................................................................................25
Options KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ......................................................................27
Options.....................................................................................................................27
Specifications KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ...........................................................30
General Description .................................................................................................30
Characteristics .........................................................................................................32
System Capacity ......................................................................................................33
Installation KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ....................................... 37
2.1
2.1.1
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.2.8
2.2.9
2.2.10
2.2.11
2.2.12
2.2.13
2.2.14
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
2.4.7
2.4.8
2.4.9
Before Installation KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ....................................................38

Before Installation ....................................................................................................38
Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ............................40
Unpacking ................................................................................................................40
Names and Locations ..............................................................................................41
Opening/Closing the Front Cover.............................................................................42
Installing/Replacing the Power Supply Unit .............................................................44
Frame Earth Connection ..........................................................................................48
Backup Batteries Connection...................................................................................49
Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards......................................................50
Types of Connectors ................................................................................................55
Attaching a Ferrite Core ...........................................................................................57
Fastening Amphenol Type Connector ......................................................................59
Wall Mounting (KX-TDA200) ....................................................................................61
Floor Standing (KX-TDA200 Only)...........................................................................65
Lightning Protector Installation.................................................................................68
Installation of the Main Processing Card KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ...............71
MPR Card ................................................................................................................71
MEC Card ................................................................................................................73
RMT Card ................................................................................................................74
Installation of the Trunk Cards KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ................................75
LCOT4, LCOT8, and LCOT16 Cards .......................................................................75
DID8 Card ................................................................................................................77
CID/PAY8 Card.........................................................................................................79
CID8 Card ................................................................................................................80
E&M8 Card ..............................................................................................................81
T1 Card ....................................................................................................................84
E1 Card....................................................................................................................87
BRI4 and BRI8 Cards ..............................................................................................90
PRI30 Card ..............................................................................................................94
Installation Manual
15
2.4.10
2.4.11
2.4.12
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
2.5.5
2.5.6
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.4
2.6.5
2.6.6
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.7.4
2.8
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.3
2.8.4
2.8.5
2.8.6
2.8.7
2.8.8
2.9
2.9.1
2.9.2
2.9.3
2.9.4
2.9.5
2.9.6
2.9.7
2.9.8
2.10
2.10.1
2.11
2.11.1
2.12
2.12.1
2.13
2.13.1
16
PRI23 Card.............................................................................................................. 98
IP-GW4 Card......................................................................................................... 101
IP-GW4E Card ...................................................................................................... 104
Installation of the Extension Cards KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200...................... 106
CSIF4 and CSIF8 Card ......................................................................................... 106
DHLC8 Card.......................................................................................................... 108
DLC8 Card ............................................................................................................ 111
DLC16 Card .......................................................................................................... 113
SLC8 Card............................................................................................................. 115
SLC16 and MSLC16 Cards................................................................................... 117
Installation of the Other Cards KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ............................. 119
OPB3 Card ............................................................................................................ 119
DPH4 Card ............................................................................................................ 120
DPH2 Card ............................................................................................................ 122
ECHO16 Card ....................................................................................................... 125
MSG4 Card ........................................................................................................... 126
CTI-LINK Card....................................................................................................... 127
Connection of Extensions KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 .................................... 129
Maximum Cabling Distances of the Extension Wiring (Twisted Cable) ................. 129
Parallel Connection of the Extensions................................................................... 130
Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection .............................................. 132
First Party Call Control CTI Connection ................................................................ 137
Connection of DECT Portable Stations KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ............... 138
Overview ............................................................................................................... 138
Procedure Overview.............................................................................................. 140
Site Planning ......................................................................................................... 142
Before Site Survey ................................................................................................ 146
Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TD7590.................................................... 150
After Site Survey ................................................................................................... 154
Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX ................................................... 155
Wall Mounting........................................................................................................ 164
Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ............ 166
Overview ............................................................................................................... 166
Site Planning ......................................................................................................... 170
Site Survey ............................................................................................................ 176
Wall Mounting........................................................................................................ 189
Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 .. 191
Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers..................................................... 191
Connection of Peripherals KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 .................................... 194
Connection of Peripherals ..................................................................................... 194
Power Failure Connections KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200................................... 198
Power Failure Connections.................................................................................... 198
Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ................................... 202
Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX.................................................................................... 202
Installation Manual
Guide for the KX-TDA Maintenance Console KX-TDA100/KXTDA200......................................................................................... 205
3.1
3.1.1
3.2
3.2.1
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
Overview KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 .................................................................206

Overview ................................................................................................................206
Connection KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200..............................................................207
Connection.............................................................................................................207
Installation of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ......209
Installing and Starting the KX-TDA Maintenance Console ....................................209
Structure of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console ....................................................213
Hybrid IP-PBX Configuration .................................................................................214
Hybrid IP-PBX Maintenance ..................................................................................215
Troubleshooting KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ............................ 219
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
Troubleshooting KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 .....................................................220

Installation..............................................................................................................220
Connection.............................................................................................................221
Operation ...............................................................................................................223
Using the Reset Button ..........................................................................................225
Troubleshooting by Error Log .................................................................................227
<KX-TDA30>
5
System Outline KX-TDA30..................................................... 237
5.1
5.1.1
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.3
5.3.1
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
System Highlights KX-TDA30.........................................................................238

System Highlights ..................................................................................................238
Basic System Construction KX-TDA30 .........................................................240
Main Unit................................................................................................................240
System Connection Diagram .................................................................................241
Options KX-TDA30 ..........................................................................................243
Options...................................................................................................................243
Specifications KX-TDA30................................................................................245
General Description ...............................................................................................245
Characteristics .......................................................................................................247
System Capacity ....................................................................................................248
Installation KX-TDA30............................................................ 253
6.1
6.1.1
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.2.6
6.2.7
6.2.8
6.2.9
6.2.10
6.2.11
Before Installation KX-TDA30.........................................................................254

Before Installation ..................................................................................................254
Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30.................................................256
Unpacking ..............................................................................................................256
Names and Locations ............................................................................................257
Opening/Closing the Covers ..................................................................................258
Installation of the SD Memory Card .......................................................................261
Frame Earth Connection ........................................................................................262
Backup Batteries Connection.................................................................................263
Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards....................................................264
Types of Connectors ..............................................................................................274
Wall Mounting (AC Adaptor) ..................................................................................279
Lightning Protector Installation...............................................................................282
Installation Manual
17
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
6.3.4
6.3.5
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
6.5.4
6.5.5
6.5.6
6.5.7
6.6
6.6.1
6.6.2
6.6.3
6.6.4
6.7
6.7.1
6.7.2
6.7.3
6.7.4
6.7.5
6.7.6
6.7.7
6.7.8
6.8
6.8.1
6.8.2
6.8.3
6.8.4
6.8.5
6.8.6
6.8.7
6.8.8
6.9
6.9.1
6.10
6.10.1
6.11
6.11.1
6.12
6.12.1
18
Installation of the Trunk Cards KX-TDA30.................................................... 285

LCOT4 Card .......................................................................................................... 285
LCOT2 Card .......................................................................................................... 287
CID4 Card ............................................................................................................. 288
BRI2 Card.............................................................................................................. 289
IP-GW4 Card......................................................................................................... 292
Installation of the Extension Cards KX-TDA30 ............................................ 294
DLC4 Card ............................................................................................................ 294
SLC4 Card............................................................................................................. 296
DLC8 Card ............................................................................................................ 297
SLC8 Card............................................................................................................. 299
Installation of the Other Cards KX-TDA30.................................................... 300
DPH4 Card ............................................................................................................ 300
DPH2 Card ............................................................................................................ 303
ECHO8 Card ......................................................................................................... 306
MSG2 Card ........................................................................................................... 307
EXT-CID Card........................................................................................................ 308
MEC Card.............................................................................................................. 309
RMT Card.............................................................................................................. 311
Connection of Extensions KX-TDA30 ........................................................... 313
Maximum Cabling Distances of the Extension Wiring (Twisted Cable) ................. 313
Parallel Connection of the Extensions................................................................... 314
Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection .............................................. 316
First Party Call Control CTI Connection ................................................................ 321
Connection of DECT Portable Stations KX-TDA30...................................... 322
Overview ............................................................................................................... 322
Site Planning ......................................................................................................... 326
Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TD7590.................................................... 334
Wall Mounting........................................................................................................ 346
Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations KX-TDA30 .................................. 348
Overview ............................................................................................................... 348
Site Planning ......................................................................................................... 351
Site Survey ............................................................................................................ 357
Wall Mounting........................................................................................................ 369
Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers KX-TDA30......................... 371
Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers..................................................... 371
Connection of Peripherals KX-TDA30........................................................... 381
Connection of Peripherals ..................................................................................... 381
Power Failure Connections KX-TDA30 ......................................................... 385
Power Failure Connections.................................................................................... 385
Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30.......................................................... 387
Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX.................................................................................... 387
Installation Manual
Guide for the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console KX-TDA30 ..... 391
7.1
7.1.1
7.2
7.2.1
7.3
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
7.3.4
Troubleshooting KX-TDA30 ................................................... 403
8.1
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
8.1.5
Overview KX-TDA30 ........................................................................................392

Overview ................................................................................................................392
Connection KX-TDA30 ....................................................................................393
Connection.............................................................................................................393
Installation of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console.........................................395
Installing and Starting the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console ................................395
Structure of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console ................................................399
Hybrid IP-PBX Configuration .................................................................................400
Hybrid IP-PBX Maintenance ..................................................................................401
Troubleshooting KX-TDA30 ............................................................................404

Installation..............................................................................................................404
Connection.............................................................................................................405
Operation ...............................................................................................................407
Using the Reset Button ..........................................................................................409
Troubleshooting by Error Log .................................................................................411
Appendix...................................................................................... 421
9.1
9.1.1
9.1.2
Revision History...................................................................................................422
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: Version 1.1 ....................................................................422
KX-TDA30: Version 1.1 ..........................................................................................423
Index .................................................................................................. 425
Installation Manual
19
20
Installation Manual
Section 1
System Outline KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
This section provides general information on the Hybrid

IP-PBX, including the system capacity and
specifications.
Installation Manual
21
1.1 System Highlights KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
1.1
System Highlights KX-TDA100/KXTDA200
1.1.1
System Highlights
Networking Features
This Hybrid IP-PBX supports the following networking features:
TIE Line Service
A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between 2 or more PBXs, which
provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations.
Virtual Private Network (VPN)
VPN is a service provided by the telephone company. It uses an existing line as if it were
a private line.
QSIG Network
QSIG is a protocol which is based on ISDN (Q.931) and offers enhanced PBX features in
a private network.
Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network
The PBX can connect to another PBX via a private IP network. In this case, voice signals
are converted into IP packets and sent through this network.
Built-in Small Call Centre Features

An incoming call distribution group can be used as a small call centre with the following
features:
Queuing Feature
When a preprogrammed number of extensions in an incoming call distribution group are
busy, additional incoming calls can wait in a queue. While calls are waiting in the queue,
the calls are handled by the Queuing Time Table, which can be assigned for each time
mode (day/lunch/break/night).
Log-in/Log-out
Incoming call distribution group members can join (Log-in) or leave (Log-out) the groups
manually. While logged-in, a member extension can have a preprogrammed time period
automatically for refusing calls after completing the last call (Wrap-up).
VIP Call
It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups. If an extension
belongs to multiple groups and the extension becomes idle, queuing calls in the groups
will be distributed to the extension in priority order.
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Features

Connecting a personal computer (PC) to this Hybrid IP-PBX (via a DPT, or via a Server PC on
a LAN) enables extension users to make use of advanced features by using the stored data in
the PC or in the Server PC.
Voice Mail Features

This Hybrid IP-PBX supports Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF Integration as well
as DPT (Digital) Integration.
22
Installation Manual
1.1 System Highlights KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
Parallelled Telephone Features

By connecting telephones in parallel, you can increase the number of telephones connected
to the PBX without adding additional extension cards.
Parallel Mode
An SLT can be connected to an APT or DPT which is connected to a Super Hybrid Port of
the PBX. The SLT shares the same extension number with the APT or DPT.
EXtra Device Port (XDP) Mode
An SLT can be connected to a DPT which is connected to a Super Hybrid Port of the PBX.
Unlike parallel mode, XDP mode allows each telephone to act as an independent
extension with its own extension number.
Digital XDP
A DPT can be connected to another DPT which is connected to a DPT port or a Super
Hybrid Port of the PBX. Similar to XDP mode, each DPT acts as an independent extension
with its own extension number.
Portable Station (PS) Features

PSs (e.g., KX-TD7690) can be connected to this Hybrid IP-PBX. It is possible to use the Hybrid
IP-PBX features using the PS like a PT. A PS can also be used in parallel with a wired
telephone (Wireless XDP Parallel Mode). In this case, the wired telephone is the main
telephone and the PS is the sub telephone.
PC Phone/PC Console Features

This Hybrid IP-PBX supports PC Phone and PC Console. These Panasonic CTI applications
provide advanced features.
Installation Manual
23
1.2 Basic System Construction KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
1.2
Basic System Construction KX-TDA100/

KX-TDA200
1.2.1
Basic Shelf
The basic shelf contains an MPR card. For system expansion, optional service cards and a
power supply unit can be installed in the basic shelf.
KX-TDA100
KX-TDA200
Construction of Basic Shelf

A: Slots for Expansion
B: MPR Card
24
Installation Manual
1.2.2
System Connection Diagram
Private
IP Network
Trunk (Telephone Company Lines)

Analogue/BRI/PRI/T1/E1
Remote PC
Hybrid IP-PBX
Router
PC
Batteries
Server PC
SLT
SLT
PC
Fax Machine
DPT
PC
Wireless Phone
APT
DSS Console
DPT
DSS Console
PC
Printer
ISDN Telephone
Doorphone & Door Opener
BGM/Music On Hold (MOH)
PS
CS
USB
KX-T7636/
KX-T7633
Pager/ Amplifier
Speaker
PC
Voice Processing
System
KX-T7600 DPT
KX-T7600 DPT
Installation Manual
25
Hybrid IP-PBX
LCOT4
(KX-TDA0183)
LCOT16
(KX-TDA0181)
Analogue
Trunk
Analogue
Trunk
Telephone
Company
E & M Line
ISDN BRI Line
(Digital Trunk)
T1 Line
(Digital Trunk)
E1 Line
(Digital Trunk)
Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR)
PT-interface CS
DHLC8
(KX-TDA0170)
DSS
Console
PS
APT
DPT
DSS Console
KX-T7600 DPT KX-T7600 DPT
DID8
(KX-TDA0182)
E&M8
(KX-TDA0184)
BRI8
(KX-TDA0288)
PRI30
(KX-TDA0290
CE/CJ)
PRI23
(KX-TDA0290)
IP-GW4
(KX-TDA0480)
Batteries
PC
CID8
(KX-TDA0193)
E1
(KX-TDA0188)
Router
KX-T7636/KX-T7633
CID/PAY8
(KX-TDA0189)
T1
(KX-TDA0187)
Private
IP Network
DPT
DLC8
(KX-TDA0171)
LCOT8
(KX-TDA0180)
BRI4
(KX-TDA0284)
ISDN PRI Line
(Digital Trunk)
DLC16
(KX-TDA0172)
IP-GW4E
(KX-TDA0484)
PSU-S/M/L*1
(KX-TDA0108/
KX-TDA0104/
KX-TDA0103)
MSLC16
(KX-TDA0175)
Voice
Processing
System
SLC8
(KX-TDA0173)
CSIF4
(KX-TDA0143)
SLT
Wireless Phone
Fax Machine
CSIF8
(KX-TDA0144)
CTI-LINK
(KX-TDA0410)
OPB3
(KX-TDA0190)
CS
PS
LAN
DPH4
(KX-TDA0161)
DPH2
(KX-TDA0162)
PC
Server PC*2
ECHO16
(KX-TDA0166)
MSG4
(KX-TDA0191)
MPR
(Installed by default)
MEC
(KX-TDA0105)
SLT Wireless Phone Fax Machine PT-interface CS PS
SLC16
(KX-TDA0174)
Server PC*2
RMT
(KX-TDA0196)
Amplifier
Pager/Speaker
Radio
PC
*1
*2
26
Mountable Equipment
The KX-TDA100CN and KX-TDA200CN have a power supply unit (PSU-S and PSU-M, respectively)
pre-installed.
Only 1 Server PC can be connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX. Two or more Server PCs cannot be used
simultaneously.
Installation Manual
1.3 Options KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
1.3
Options KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
1.3.1
Options
Maximum Quantity
Model No.
Model Name
Description
KX-TDA100 KX-TDA200
KX-TDA0105
Memory Expansion
Card (MEC)
Memory expansion card for

Broadcasting features and to double
the number of DPTs, using Digital
XDP connection. To be mounted on
the MPR card.
KX-TDA0143
4 Cell Station
Interface Card
(CSIF4)
4-port CS interface card for 4 CSs.
KX-TDA0144
8 Cell Station
Interface Card
(CSIF8)
8-port CS interface card for 8 CSs.
KX-TDA0161
4-Port Doorphone
Card (DPH4)
4-port doorphone card for 4

doorphones and 4 door openers. To
be mounted on the OPB3 card.
KX-TDA0162
2-Port Doorphone
Card (German Type)
(DPH2)
2-port doorphone card for 2 German

type doorphones and 2 door
openers. To be mounted on the
OPB3 card.
KX-TDA0166
16-Channel Echo
Canceller Card
(ECHO16)
16-channel card for echo

cancellation during conferences. To
be mounted on the OPB3 card.
KX-TDA0170
8-Port Digital Hybrid

Extension Card
(DHLC8)
8-port digital hybrid extension card

for DPTs, APTs, SLTs, DSS
consoles, and PT-interface CSs,
with 2 power failure transfer (PFT)
ports.
KX-TDA0171
8-Port Digital
Extension Card
(DLC8)
8-port digital extension card for

DPTs, DSS consoles, and PTinterface CSs.
KX-TDA0172
16-Port Digital
Extension Card
(DLC16)
16-port digital extension card for

DPTs, DSS consoles, and PTinterface CSs.
KX-TDA0173
8-Port Single Line

8-port extension card for SLTs with 2
Telephone Extension power failure transfer (PFT) ports.
Card (SLC8)
KX-TDA0174
16-Port Single Line

16-port extension card for SLTs with
Telephone Extension 4 power failure transfer (PFT) ports.
Card (SLC16)
Installation Manual
27
Maximum Quantity
Model No.
Model Name
Description
KX-TDA100 KX-TDA200
KX-TDA0175
16-Port Single Line

Telephone Extension
with Message Lamp
Card (MSLC16)
16-port extension card for SLTs with

Message Waiting Lamp control and
4 power failure transfer (PFT) ports.
Maximum power output of 160 V/90
V for Message Waiting Lamp
control.
KX-TDA0180
8-Port Analogue
Trunk Card (LCOT8)
8-port analogue trunk card with 2

power failure transfer (PFT) ports.
KX-TDA0181
16-Port Analogue
Trunk Card (LCOT16) power failure transfer (PFT) ports.
KX-TDA0182
8-Port DID Card

(DID8)
8-port DID trunk card.
KX-TDA0183
4-Port Analogue
Trunk Card (LCOT4)

power failure transfer (PFT) ports.
KX-TDA0184
8-Port E & M Trunk

Card (E&M8)
8-port E & M (TIE) trunk card. Type

5 support.
KX-TDA0187
T-1 Trunk Card (T1)
1-port T1 trunk card. EIA/TIA

standard compliant.
KX-TDA0188
E-1 Trunk Card (E1)
1-port E1 trunk card. ITU-T standard

compliant.
KX-TDA0189
8-Port Caller ID/Pay

Tone Card (CID/
PAY8)
8-port Caller ID signal type FSK/

FSK (with Call Waiting Caller ID
[Visual Caller ID])/DTMF, and 8
ports of Pay Tone Service (12 kHz/
16 kHz). To be mounted on the
LCOT8/LCOT16 cards.
16
KX-TDA0190
Optional 3-Slot Base

Card (OPB3)
Optional 3-slot base card for

mounting a maximum of 3 option
cards from the following: MSG4,
DPH4, DPH2, or ECHO16 card.
KX-TDA0191
4-Channel Message
Card (MSG4)
4-channel message card. To be

mounted on the OPB3 card.
KX-TDA0193
8-Port Caller ID Card 8-port Caller ID signal type FSK/

(CID8)
FSK (with Call Waiting Caller ID
[Visual Caller ID])/DTMF. To be
mounted on the LCOT8/LCOT16
cards.
16
KX-TDA0196
Remote Card (RMT)
Analogue modem card for remote

communication with the Hybrid IPPBX. V90 support. To be mounted
on the MPR card.
KX-TDA0284
4-Port BRI Card

(BRI4)
4-port ISDN Basic Rate Interface

card with 1 power failure transfer
port. EURO-ISDN/ETSI compliant.
28
Installation Manual
Maximum Quantity
Model No.
Model Name
Description
KX-TDA100 KX-TDA200
KX-TDA0288
8-Port BRI Card

(BRI8)
8-port ISDN Basic Rate Interface

card with 1 power failure transfer
port. EURO-ISDN/ETSI compliant.
KX-TDA0290CE/ PRI Card (PRI30)

CJ
1-port ISDN Primary Rate Interface

card (30B channels). EURO-ISDN/
ETSI compliant.
KX-TDA0290
PRI Card (PRI23)
1-port ISDN Primary Rate Interface

card (23B channels). NI (North
American standard ISDN protocol)
compliant.
KX-TDA0410
CTI Link Card (CTILINK)
Ethernet card for CTI

communication via 10BASE-T port.
CSTA Phase 3 protocol compatible.
KX-TDA0480
4-Channel VoIP
Gateway Card (IPGW4)
4-channel VoIP gateway card. VoIP

H.323 V.2, ITU-T G.729a, and
G.723.1 compliant. G3 fax support.
KX-TDA0484
4-Channel VoIP
Gateway Card (IPGW4E)

H.323 V.2, ITU-T G.729a, G.723.1,
and G.711 compliant.
KX-TDA0103
L-Type Power Supply Power Supply Unit for KX-TDA200.

Unit (PSU-L)
Total power output of 279 W. Safety
Class 1 compliant.
KX-TDA0104
M-Type Power Supply Power Supply Unit for KX-TDA100

Unit (PSU-M)
and KX-TDA200. Total power output
of 140.4 W. Safety Class 1
compliant.
KX-TDA0108
S-Type Power Supply Power Supply Unit for KX-TDA100.

Unit (PSU-S)
Total power output of 74 W. Safety
Class 1 compliant.
Installation Manual
29
1.4 Specifications KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
1.4
Specifications KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
1.4.1
General Description
Control Bus
Original bus (16-bit, 8 MHz, 10 megabytes per second)
Communication Bus
H.100 bus conformity (1024 time slot)
Switching
Non-blocking
Power Input
PSU-S
100 V AC to 130 V AC, 1.4 A/200 V AC to 240 V AC, 0.8 A,

50 Hz/60 Hz
PSU-M

50 Hz/60 Hz
PSU-L

50 Hz/60 Hz
External Battery
+36 V DC (+12 V DC 3, battery capacity of 28 Ah or below

recommended for each external battery)
Maximum Power Failure Tolerance
300 ms (without using backup batteries)
Memory Backup Duration
7 years
Dialling
Trunk
Dial Pulse (DP) 10 pps, 20 pps

Tone (DTMF) Dialling
Extension

Mode Conversion
DP-DTMF, DTMF-DP
Ring Frequency
20 Hz/25 Hz (selectable)
Trunk Loop Limit
1600
Operating
Environment
maximum
Temperature
0 C to 40 C
Humidity
10 % to 90 % (non-condensing)
Conference Call Trunk
From 10 3-party conference call to 4 8-party conference

call
Music on Hold (MOH)
2 ports (Level Control: -11 dB to +11 dB in 1 dB steps)

MOH1: External Music Source port
MOH2: Selectable Internal/External Music Source port
Paging
Serial Interface Port
30
Installation Manual
Internal
Level Control: -15 dB to +6 dB in 3 dB steps
External
2 ports (Volume Control: -15 dB to +15 dB in 1 dB steps)
RS-232C
1 (maximum 115.2 kbps)
USB
Extension Connection Cable
Dimension
Weight (when fully

mounted)
SLT
1-pair wire (T, R)
DPT
1-pair wire (D1, D2) or

2-pair wire (T, R, D1, D2)
APT
PT-interface CS
1-pair wire (D1, D2)
DSS Console and Add-on

Key Module
KX-TDA100
334 mm (W) 390 mm (H) 270 mm (D)
KX-TDA200
430 mm (W) 415 mm (H) 270 mm (D)
KX-TDA100
Under 12 kg
KX-TDA200
Under 16 kg
Installation Manual
31
1.4.2
Characteristics
Terminal Equipment Loop Limit
Minimum Leakage Resistance
PT: KX-T7600 series: 90
SLT: 600
Doorphone: 20
CS: 130
15 000
; all other DPTs/APTs: 40
including set
; PT-interface CS: 65
minimum
Maximum Number of Extension 1 for PT or SLT

Instruments per Line
2 by Parallel or eXtra Device Port connection of a PT and an SLT
3 by Digital eXtra Device Port connection of two DPTs and an SLT
Ring Voltage
75 Vrms at 20 Hz/25 Hz depending on the Ringing Load
Trunk Loop Limit
1600
Hookswitch Flash/Recall
Timing Range
24 ms to 2032 ms
BRI Cards Internal ISDN Mode
Supply Voltage: 40 V
Power Supply: 4.5 W per 1 line, 10 W per 4 lines (BRI4)
4.5 W per 1 line, 20 W per 8 lines (BRI8)
Power Supply Method: Phantom Power Supply
Door Opener Current Limit
24 V DC/30 V AC, 1 A maximum
Paging Terminal Impedance
600
MOH (Music on Hold) Terminal

Impedance
10 000
32
Installation Manual
maximum
1.4.3
System Capacity
Maximum Trunk and Extension Cards

The following number of trunk and extension cards can be installed in the Hybrid IP-PBX for
expansion.
Card Type
KX-TDA100
KX-TDA200
Trunk Card*1
Extension Card
Total
10
*1
One T1, E1, PRI30, PRI23, or IP-GW4 card counts as 2 cards. However, one IPGW4E card counts as 1 card.
Notes
For each card, the maximum number that can be installed in the Hybrid IP-PBX is
listed in "1.3.1 Options".
Any card that exceeds the capacity of the Hybrid IP-PBX will be ignored.
When the Hybrid IP-PBX starts up with an invalid configuration, some cards will be
ignored.
Maximum Terminal Equipment

The following number of items of terminal equipment can be supported by the Hybrid IP-PBX.
For how to count the total number of items of equipment to be connected, refer to "MEC Card
Calculation".
Terminal Equipment Type
KX-TDA100
KX-TDA200
Without MEC
Card
With MEC
Card
Without MEC
Card
With MEC
Card
88
152
176
304
SLT and PT
64
128
128
256
SLT
64
64
128
128
PT
64
128
128
256
Telephone*1
CS
16
32
PS
128
128
Voice Processing System

(VPS)
Doorphone
16
Door Opener
16
Add-on Key Module

USB Module
64
128
64
128
256
128
Installation Manual
33
*1
A single "T1-OPX (Off Premise Extension) port" or "BRI/PRI extension port" is counted as a wired telephone.
MEC Card Calculation

Calculate the MEC figure from the type and total number of items of equipment to be
connected. If the MEC figure exceeds 64 (for KX-TDA100) or 128 (for KX-TDA200), you need
to install an MEC card.

Equipment Type
PT
Extension Card*1
MEC Figure
KX-T7600 series DPT/DSS console
KX-T7560/KX-T7565 DPT
Other DPT/DSS console
APT
DHLC8
SLC8
SLC16
16
MSLC16
16
CS (1 unit)
PT-interface CS (1 unit)
ISDN Extension
VPS (1 port)
*1
Only the extension cards that can support SLTs count for the MEC figures.
Calculation Example (KX-TDA100)

Equipment Type
MEC Figure
KX-T7600 series DPT
48 units
48
SLC16
1 card
16
MSLC16
1 card
16
VPS
8 ports
Total
88
The total MEC figure is 88. As this exceeds 64, you need to install an MEC card for this
configuration.
34
Installation Manual
Power Supply Unit Selection

Hybrid IP-PBX needs an optional power supply unit (PSU) suitable for its configuration.
Calculate the load figure from the type and number of items of equipment to be connected, and
determine the type of PSU that will be required.
Load Figure Calculation

Equipment Type
PT
Extension Card*1
Load Figure
APT
DHLC8
SLC8
SLC16
16
MSLC16
16
CS (1 unit)
PT-interface CS (1 unit)
ISDN Extension
VPS (1 port)
*1
Only the extension cards that can support SLTs count for the load figures.
PSU Capability
Each PSU supports a different amount of load figures.
PSU Type
Maximum Load Figures
PSU-S*1
64
PSU-M*2
128
PSU-L*3
512
*1
*2
*3
Available for the KX-TDA100

Available for the KX-TDA100 and KX-TDA200
Available for the KX-TDA200
Installation Manual
35

Equipment Type
Load Figure
KX-T7600 series DPT
48 units
48
Other DPT
2 units
SLC16
1 card
16
MSLC16
1 card
16
VPS
8 ports
Total
96
The total load figure is 96. As this is between 64 and 128, you should install the PSU-M. But if
you expect expansion in the future, it may be better to install the PSU-L. There is no harm in
installing a PSU that is larger than is required for the current configuration.
36
Installation Manual
Section 2
Installation KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
This section describes the procedures to install the

Hybrid IP-PBX. Detailed instructions for planning the
installation site, installing the shelves and optional
service cards, and cabling of peripheral equipment are
provided. Further information on system expansion and
Installation Manual
37
2.1 Before Installation KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
2.1
Before Installation KX-TDA100/KXTDA200
2.1.1
Before Installation
Please read the following notes concerning installation and connection before installing the
Hybrid IP-PBX. Be sure to comply with applicable local regulations (e.g., law, guidelines).
Safety Installation Instructions

When installing telephone wiring, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce
the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
1. Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.

2. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for
wet locations.
3. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been
disconnected at the network interface.
4. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.

5. Anti-static precautions should be taken during installation.
Installation Precautions
This set is made for wall mounting (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or floor standing (KX-TDA200
only). Avoid installing in the following places. (Doing so may result in malfunction, noise, or
discolouration.)
1. In direct sunlight and hot, cold, or humid places.

Temperature range: 0 C to 40 C
2. Sulphuric gases produced in areas where there are thermal springs, etc. may damage the
equipment or contacts.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Places in which shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong.

Dusty places, or places where water or oil may come into contact with the unit.
Near high-frequency generating devices such as sewing machines or electric welders.
On or near computers, telexes, or other office equipment, as well as microwave ovens or
air conditioners. (It is preferable not to install in the same room with the above equipment.)
7. Closer than 1.8 m to radios and televisions (both the Hybrid IP-PBX and PTs).
8. Do not obstruct the area around the Hybrid IP-PBX (for reasons of maintenance and
inspectionbe especially careful to allow at least 20 cm above and 10 cm at the sides of
the Hybrid IP-PBX for cooling).
9. Do not block the openings at top of the Hybrid IP-PBX.

10. Do not stack up the optional service cards.
Wiring Precautions
Be sure to follow these instructions when wiring.
1. Do not wire the telephone cable in parallel with an AC power source, computer, telex, etc.
If the cables are run near those wires, shield the cables with metal tubing or use shielded
cables and ground the shields.
38
Installation Manual
2.1 Before Installation KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
2. If cables are run on the floor, use protectors to prevent the wires from being stepped on.
Avoid wiring under carpets.
3. Avoid using the same power supply outlet for computers, telexes, and other office
equipment. Otherwise, the Hybrid IP-PBX operation may be interrupted by the inducted
noise from such equipment.
4. Please use 1-pair telephone wire for extension connection of (telephone) equipment such
as standard telephones, data terminals, answering machines, computers, Voice
Processing Systems, etc., except PTs (e.g., KX-T7600 series).
5. The power switch and battery switch of the Hybrid IP-PBX must be off during wiring. After
the wiring is completed, turn the power switch on.
6. Mis-wiring may cause the Hybrid IP-PBX to operate improperly.

7. If an extension does not operate properly, disconnect the telephone from the extension line
and then connect again, or turn the power to the Hybrid IP-PBX off and on again.
8. The Hybrid IP-PBX is equipped with a 3-wire earthing type plug. This is a safety feature.
If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your
obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the purpose of the earthing-type plug.
9. Use twisted pair cable for trunk connection.

10. Trunks should be installed with lightning protectors. For details, refer to "2.2.14 Lightning
Protector Installation".
Installation Manual
39
2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
2.2
Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX KXTDA100/KX-TDA200
2.2.1
Unpacking
Unpack the box and check the items below:
KX-TDA100
KX-TDA200
Main Unit
AC Cord with a Ferrite Core*1
Metal Bracket
Screw A
Screw B (Black)
Anchor Plug
Mini Plug (for pager and music source)
SD Memory Card
*1
40
In Canada, there is no ferrite core attached to the AC cord.
Installation Manual
2.2.2
Names and Locations
Inside View
KX-TDA100
KX-TDA200
RS-232C Port
RS-232C Port
USB Port
USB Port
ALARM Indicator
RUN Indicator
ALARM Indicator
RUN Indicator
PSU Slot
MPR Card Slot
Null Slot*
PSU Slot
MPR Card Slot
Free Slots 1 to 10
Free Slots 1 to 5
Option Card Slot
Option Card Slot
Note
* Null slot is not available for any optional service card.
Installation Manual
41
2.2.3
Opening/Closing the Front Cover
Opening the Front Cover

1. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the opening (on the left of the screw cover) and unlatch
the screw cover.
Screw Cover
2. Turn the screw anticlockwise to loosen.
3. Slide the front cover to the right until it stops, then lift the front cover.
42
Installation Manual
Closing the Front Cover

1. Hook the front cover onto the cabinet (line up the protrusions on the cover with the
receptacles on the cabinet). Then slide the front cover to the left until it locks.
2. Turn the screw clockwise to tighten.
3. Secure the screw cover.

2
1
Notes
For safety reasons, close the front cover and tighten the screw when the Hybrid IPPBX is in operation.
Do not forget to tighten the screw before securing the screw cover.
Installation Manual
43
2.2.4
Installing/Replacing the Power Supply Unit
Function
PSU Type
Lower/Upper Input Voltage Range
Current
PSU-S
(for KX-TDA100)
Lower: 100 V AC to 130 V AC
1.4 A
Upper: 200 V AC to 240 V AC
0.8 A
PSU-M
(for KX-TDA100/200)
2.5 A
1.4 A
PSU-L
(for KX-TDA200)
5.1 A
2.55 A
Input
Frequency
50 Hz or 60 Hz
PSU-S
PSU-M/PSU-L
Battery Switch
Battery Switch
Battery Connector
Battery Connector
Earth Terminal
Power Switch
Earth Terminal
AC Inlet
Power Switch
AC Inlet
Accessory and User-supplied Items

Accessory (included): Screws 4
User-supplied (not included): earthing wire, Back-up Battery Cable (KX-A228 for PSU-S and
PSU-M, or KX-A229 for PSU-L)
Notes
For details about frame earth connection, refer to "2.2.5 Frame Earth Connection".
For details about backup batteries connection, refer to "2.2.6 Backup Batteries
Connection".
Safety Instructions
Each PSU complies with Safety Class 1 of IEC60950, EN60950, UL60950,
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.60950, and AS/NZS60950; therefore a protective earth connection exists
between the mains outlet ground and the PSU case. To ensure the PBX chassis is safely
grounded, it is essential that the PSU case be securely fastened to the PBX chassis with the 4
screws provided with each PSU.
When installing or replacing PSU, basic safety precautions should always be followed to
reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
44
Installation Manual
1. Never install or replace PSU during a lightning storm.

2. Never install or replace PSU in wet locations.
3. Never install or replace PSU unless at least 20 s has elapsed after the AC supply and
backup battery supply are disconnected.
4. To protect the back board from static electricity, do not touch parts on the back board
in the main unit and PSU. To discharge static electricity, touch ground or wear an
earthing strap.
The following procedures are for installing or replacing a PSU only. Do not replace or
remove the PSU for any other purpose.
Installing the Power Supply Unit

1. Insert the PSU along the guide rails.
CAUTION
For safety reasons, do not touch parts in the PSU.
Guide Rail
Installation Manual
45
2. Push the release lever in the direction of the arrow, so that the PSU engages securely with
the connector on the back board.
Back Board
Release Lever
3. Turn the 4 screws clockwise, in the order indicated by the numbers 1 to 4, to fix the PSU.
3 2
Screws
4 1
Replacing the Power Supply Unit

1. Unplug the AC power cord and Back-up Battery Cable.
46
Installation Manual
2. Turn the 4 screws anticlockwise to loosen them.
Screws
3. Pull the release lever in the direction of the arrow to disconnect the PSU from the back
board.
Back Board
Release Lever
4. Replace the PSU.
New PSU
Current PSU
5. Follow the steps in "Installing the Power Supply Unit".
Installation Manual
47
2.2.5
Frame Earth Connection

IMPORTANT
Connect the frame of the Hybrid IP-PBX to earth.
1. Loosen the screw.

2. Insert an earthing wire (user-
Screw
supplied)*.
3. Tighten the screw.

4. Connect the earthing wire to
earth.
Earthing
wire
To earth
* For earthing wire, green-and-yellow insulation is required, and the cross-sectional area of
the conductor must be more than 0.75 mm2 or 18 AWG.
48
Be sure to comply with applicable local regulations (e.g., law, guidelines).

Proper earthing (connection to earth) is very important to protect the Hybrid IP-PBX from
the bad effects of external noise or to reduce the risk to the user of electrocution in the
case of lightning strike.
The earthing wire of the AC cable has an effect against the external noise and lightning
strikes, but it may not be enough to protect the Hybrid IP-PBX. A permanent connection
between earth and the earth terminal of the Hybrid IP-PBX must be made.
Installation Manual
2.2.6
Backup Batteries Connection

The backup batteries and Back-up Battery Cable (KX-A228 for PSU-S and PSU-M, or KXA229 for PSU-L) provide a backup power supply to allow full use of the Hybrid IP-PBX in the
event of a power failure. In case of power failure, the backup batteries automatically maintain
the power to the Hybrid IP-PBX without interruption.
1. Turn off the battery switch on the PSU.

2. Connect the Back-up Battery Cable with 3 identical VRLA (Valve Regulated Lead Acid)
batteries (12 V DC 3).
ON
Battery Switch
Battery Connector
OFF
Back-up Battery Cable

Fuse
Red
Black
Backup Batteries (12 V DC x 3)
Turn on the battery switch on the PSU only after the installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX is
finished and AC power is available.
For each backup battery, battery capacity of 28 Ah or below is recommended (otherwise,
the battery charge may not be maintained).
Make sure that the type and capacity of the 3 backup batteries are identical.
The Back-up Battery Cable should not be exposed to direct sunlight. Keep the Back-up
Battery Cable and the backup batteries away from heating appliances and fire. Place the
backup batteries in ventilated place.
For details about the backup batteries, refer to the manual intended for the batteries.
CAUTION

Make sure that the polarities of the backup batteries and wiring are correct.
Make sure that you do not short the backup batteries or cables.
There is a danger of explosion if backup batteries are incorrectly replaced. Replace
only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the battery manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions.
Use the correct type of Back-up Battery Cable for the type of the PSU.
Installation Manual
49
2.2.7
Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards
Slot Condition
Card Type
Slot Type
KX-TDA100: Free Slots 1 to 5
KX-TDA200: Free Slots 1 to 10
Option Slot
MPR Slot
MPR Card
No
No
Yes
Trunk Cards
Yes
No
No
Extension Cards
Yes
No
No
OPB3 Card
Yes
Yes
No
CTI-LINK Card
Yes
Yes
No
CAUTION
To protect the back board from static electricity, do not touch parts on the back board in
the main unit and on the optional service cards. To discharge static electricity, touch
ground or wear an earthing strap.
Note
The optional service cards can be installed or removed while the DC power is supplied.
However, when installing or removing the MPR card, the DC power supply must be turned
off.
Installing Optional Service Cards

1. Insert the card along the guide rails.
Guide Rail
50
Installation Manual
2. Holding the card as shown below, push the release lever in the direction of the arrow so
that the card engages securely with the connector on the back board.
Back Board
Release Lever
3. Turn the 2 screws clockwise to fix the card in place.
Screws
Note
Make sure the screws are tightened to earth the card securely.
Installation Manual
51
Covering the Blank Slots

Be sure to cover each slot in which no optional service card is installed by using a Blank Slot
Cover.
CAUTION
Failure to install the Blank Slot Cover may cause electromagnetic interferences.
52
Installation Manual
Handling of the Cables

When cables are connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX, run the cables to either right or left and then
towards the backside of the cabinet as shown below.
Note
For safety reasons, do not stretch, bend, or pinch the AC power cord.
Installation Manual
53
Removing the Optional Service Cards

1. Turn the 2 screws anticlockwise to loosen them.
Screws
2. Pull the release lever in the direction of the arrow to disconnect the card from the back
board. Pull the card from the cabinet to remove it.
Back Board
Release Lever
54
Installation Manual
2.2.8
Types of Connectors
Connector Type
Pin Number
RJ11
1
4
Used for
DHLC8 (KX-TDA0170)
SLC8 (KX-TDA0173)
SLC16 (KX-TDA0174)
MSLC16 (KX-TDA0175)
LCOT8 (KX-TDA0180)
LCOT16 (KX-TDA0181)
LCOT4 (KX-TDA0183)
CSIF4 (KX-TDA0143)
CSIF8 (KX-TDA0144)
T1 (KX-TDA0187)
E1 (KX-TDA0188)
BRI4 (KX-TDA0284)
BRI8 (KX-TDA0288)
PRI30 (KX-TDA0290CE/CJ)
PRI23 (KX-TDA0290)
CTI-LINK (KX-TDA0410)
IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0480)
IP-GW4E (KX-TDA0484)
E1 (KX-TDA0188)
PRI30 (KX-TDA0290CE/CJ)
DHLC8 (KX-TDA0170)
DLC8 (KX-TDA0171)
DLC16 (KX-TDA0172)
SLC8 (KX-TDA0173)
SLC16 (KX-TDA0174)
MSLC16 (KX-TDA0175)
LCOT8 (KX-TDA0180)
LCOT16 (KX-TDA0181)
DID8 (KX-TDA0182)
LCOT4 (KX-TDA0183)
E&M8 (KX-TDA0184)
(Twisted pair cable)
RJ45
8
BNC
1
2
Amphenol
Type A Type B
(Shielded twisted
pair cable)
50
25
26
Installation Manual
55
Connector Type
10-pin
8-pin
Terminal Terminal
Block
Block
Pin Number
1
1
10
Used for
DPH4 (KX-TDA0161)
DPH2 (KX-TDA0162)
IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0480)
Basic Shelf
MPR
MPR
RS-232C
6
USB
3
Mini Plug
2
4
56
Installation Manual
2.2.9
Attaching a Ferrite Core

A ferrite core must be attached when:
connecting T1, E1, PRI, and BRI cards using an RJ45 connector (except in Canada,
where the ferrite core is not necessarily required), or
connecting extension cards using an Amphenol connector.

The ferrite core is included with the card.
When connecting a T1/E1/PRI card

Wrap the cable once around the ferrite core, then close the case of the ferrite core. Attach the
ferrite core 5 cm away from the connector.
5 cm
When connecting a BRI card

Attach the ferrite core, then close the case of the ferrite core. Attach the ferrite core as close to
the cards connector as possible.
When only 1 or 2 cables are used for connection, wrap the

cable(s) once around the ferrite core.
When 3 or 4 cables are used for connection, simply pass the

cables through the ferrite core.
Installation Manual
57
Note
For every 4 cables, use 1 ferrite core; a ferrite core holds a maximum of 4 cables.
When connecting an extension card

Pass the cable through the ferrite core, then close the case of the ferrite core. Attach the ferrite
core 3 cm away from the connector.
3 cm
If you need to open the ferrite core, use a flathead screwdriver to unlatch the case of the ferrite
core.
58
Installation Manual
2.2.10 Fastening Amphenol Type Connector

An Amphenol 57JE type connector is used on some of the optional service cards.
To connect an Amphenol connector, use the spring latch or screw to fix the upper part and use
Velcro tape to fix the lower part of the connector.
Type A (Spring Latch + Velcro Tape)
Type B (Screw + Velcro Tape)
Velcro
Tape
Velcro
Tape
Spring
Latch
Remove the
screw on the
optional service
card.
Spring
Latch
Insert the screw (included

with the Amphenol or
optional service card).
Installation Manual
59
Amphenol Connector Pin Assignment Chart

Below is an Amphenol connector pin assignment chart for all optional service cards that use
the Amphenol connector. For more details, refer to the appropriate section in "2.4 Installation
of the Trunk Cards KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200" and "2.5 Installation of the Extension Cards
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200".
Pin No.
1
26
2
27
3
28
4
29
5
30
6
31
7
32
8
33
9
34
10
35
11
36
12
37
13
38
14
39
15
40
16
41
17
42
18
43
19
44
20
45
21
46
22
47
23
48
24
49
25
50
60
LCOT4
RA
TA
RB
TB
RC
TC
RD
TD
Installation Manual
LCOT8
RA
TA
RB
TB
RC
TC
RD
TD
RE
TE
RF
TF
RG
TG
RH
TH
LCOT16
RA
TA
RB
TB
RC
TC
RD
TD
RE
TE
RF
TF
RG
TG
RH
TH
RI
TI
RJ
TJ
RK
TK
RL
TL
RM
TM
RN
TN
RO
TO
RP
TP
DID8
RA
TA
RB
TB
RC
TC
RD
TD
RE
TE
RF
TF
RG
TG
RH
TH
E&M8
TA
RA
T1A
R1A
EA
MA
SGA
SGB
TB
RB
T1B
R1B
EB
MB
TC
RC
T1C
R1C
EC
MC
TD
RD
T1D
R1D
ED
MD
TE
RE
T1E
R1E
EE
ME
TF
RF
T1F
R1F
EF
MF
TG
RG
T1G
R1G
EG
MG
TH
RH
T1H
R1H
EH
MH
DHLC8
RA
TA
D2A
D1A
RB
TB
D2B
D1B
RC
TC
D2C
D1C
RD
TD
D2D
D1D
RE
TE
D2E
D1E
RF
TF
D2F
D1F
RG
TG
D2G
D1G
RH
TH
D2H
D1H
DLC8
D2A
D1A
D2B
D1B
D2C
D1C
D2D
D1D
D2E
D1E
DLC16
D2A
D1A
D2B
D1B
D2C
D1C
D2D
D1D
D2E
D1E
D2F
D1F
D2G
D1G
D2H
D1H
D2I
D1I
D2J
D1J
D2K
D1K
D2L
D1L
D2M
D1M
D2N
D1N
D2O
D1O
D2P
D1P
MSLC16
RA
TA
RB
TB
RC
TC
RD
TD
RE
TE
RF
TF
RG
TG
RH
TH
RI
TI
RJ
TJ
RK
TK
RL
TL
RM
TM
RN
TN
RO
TO
RP
TP
SLC16
RA
TA
RB
TB
RC
TC
RD
TD
RE
TE
RF
TF
RG
TG
RH
TH
RI
TI
RJ
TJ
RK
TK
RL
TL
RM
TM
RN
TN
RO
TO
RP
TP
SLC8
RA
TA
RB
TB
RC
TC
RD
TD
RE
TE
RF
TF
D2F
D1F
RG
TG
D2G
D1G
RH
TH
D2H
D1H
2.2.11 Wall Mounting (KX-TDA200)

CAUTION
Drive mounting screws into the wall. Be careful to avoid touching any metal laths, wire
laths or metal plates in the wall.
1. Install 4 anchor plugs in the wall, using the metal bracket as a template. Fix the metal
bracket with 4 screws (A).
Anchor Plug
Wall
Hammer
Anchor Plug
Metal Bracket
6.5 mm
30 mm
TOP
TOP
Screw (A)
Screw (A)
Metal Bracket
Installation Manual
61
2. Hook the cabinet onto the metal bracket, making sure that the unit slides down and onto
the hooked parts of the metal bracket. Use 2 screws (B) to fix both sides of the cabinet.
TOP
Screw (B)
Notes
62
Installation Manual
Do not block the openings of the cabinet. Allow space of at least 20 cm above and 10
cm at the sides of the cabinet.
Make sure that the wall behind the cabinet is flat and free of obstacles, so that the
openings on the back of the cabinet will not be blocked.
Make sure that the wall behind the cabinet is not made of wood.
Be careful not to drop the cabinet.
2.2.12 Wall Mounting (KX-TDA100)

CAUTION
1. Install 3 anchor plugs in the wall, using the metal bracket as a template. Fix the metal
Anchor Plug
Hammer
Anchor Plug
Wall
6.5 mm
Metal Bracket
30 mm
TOP
Screw (A)
TOP
Screw (A)
Metal Bracket
Installation Manual
63
2. Hook the cabinet onto the metal bracket, making sure that the unit slides down and onto
the hooked parts of the metal bracket. Use 2 screws (B) to fix both sides of the cabinet.
TOP
Screw (B)
Notes
64
Installation Manual
Make sure that the wall behind the cabinet is not made of wood.
2.2.13 Floor Standing (KX-TDA200 Only)

1. Install 4 anchor plugs in the floor, using the metal bracket as a template. Fix the metal
Screw (A)
Metal Bracket
TOP
Screw (A)
Hammer
Anchor
Plug
Metal
Bracket
Anchor Plug
30 mm
Floor
6.5 mm
2. Remove the front cover of the cabinet (refer to "2.2.3 Opening/Closing the Front Cover").
Installation Manual
65
3. Lift the cabinet, attach it to the metal bracket, slide it backwards until it locks, and retain it
with 2 screws (B).
1
TOP
FRONT
Screws (B)
Metal Bracket
Notes
66
Installation Manual
Make sure that the surface behind the cabinet is flat and free of obstacles, so that the
Make sure that the surface behind the cabinet is not made of wood.
4. Fix the front cover on the cabinet (refer to "2.2.3 Opening/Closing the Front Cover").
Installation Manual
67
2.2.14 Lightning Protector Installation

Overview
A lightning protector is a device that must be installed on a trunk to prevent a dangerous surge
from entering the building and damaging equipment.
A dangerous surge can occur if a telephone line comes in contact with a power line. Trouble
due to lightning surges has been showing a steady increase with the development of electronic
equipment.
In many countries/areas, there are regulations requiring the installation of lightning protection.
A lightning strike to a telephone cable which is 10 m above ground can be as high as 200 000 V.
The Hybrid IP-PBX must be installed with lightning protectors. In addition, earthing (connection
to earth) is very important for the protection of the user.
Recommended Lightning Protectors
KX-A207
TELESPIKE BLOK MODEL TSB (TRIPPE MFG. CO.)
SPIKE BLOK MODEL SK6-0 (TRIPPE MFG. CO.)
Krone 237A strips fitted with 14A/1 surge arrestors
Super MAX (PANAMAX)
MP1 (ITW LINK)
Installation
Trunk
Trunk
Trunk
Lightning
Protectors
Terminal
Board
Extn.
Hybrid
IP-PBX
Extn. Extn.
SLT
Earth
68
Installation Manual
PT
CS
Frame
Earth
Extn.: Extension line
Outside Installation
(Main Building)
Lightning Protectors
Trunk
(Another Building)
Trunk
Extn.
Terminal
Board
Extn.
Lightning
Protector
CS
Extn.
Extn.
SLT
Hybrid
IP-PBX
SLT
PT
PT
CS
Earth
Extn.: Extension Line
If you install an extension outside of the building, the following precautions are recommended:
a. Install the extension wire underground.

b. Use a conduit to protect the wire.
Note
The lightning protector for an extension and CS is different from that for trunks.
Installation of an Earth Rod

Lightning Protector
Trunk
Earthing
Wire
Hybrid
IP-PBX
(Underground)
Earth Rod
1. Installation location of the earth rod.....Near the protector
Installation Manual
69
2.
3.
4.
5.
Check obstructions.....None
Composition of the earth rod.....Metal
Depth of the earth rod.....More than 50 cm
Cross sectional area of the earthing wire.....More than 1.3 mm2
Notes
70
Installation Manual
The above figures are recommendations only.

The length of earth rod and the required depth depend on the composition of the soil.
2.3 Installation of the Main Processing Card KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
2.3
Installation of the Main Processing Card

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
2.3.1
MPR Card
Function
Contains the main processor for all processes, basic shelf main protocol, time switch (TSW)
control, detection of system clock alarm, basic shelf power down alarm, and watchdog timer
overflow. An MEC card and an RMT card can be mounted on the MPR card (refer to "2.3.2
MEC Card" and "2.3.3 RMT Card").
1
2
SD
CARD
LEDs
SD Memory Card
Slot Cover
Reset Button
System Initialise
Switch
SD
Memory
Card 3
SD
CARD
USB
BGM/MOH
Pager
4
SD
CARD
Notes
For details about connecting peripherals, refer to "2.11.1 Connection of Peripherals".

For details about System Initialise Switch, refer to "2.13.1 Starting the Hybrid IPPBX".
For details about Reset Button, refer to "4.1.4 Using the Reset Button".
CAUTION
Use only the SD Memory Card included with the Hybrid IP-PBX.
The SD Memory Card contains software for all the processes of the Hybrid IP-PBX
and all the customer data. The SD Memory Card must be inserted before start up.
Installation Manual
71
Do not remove the SD Memory Card during the operation of the Hybrid IP-PBX.
Removing the SD Memory Card during operation may cause damage to the SD
Memory Card, or result in loss of data.
A LITHIUM BATTERY IS USED IN THE MPR CARD. THERE IS A RISK OF
EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED WITH THE INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE
OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
LED Indications
Indication
72
Colour
Description
BATT ALARM Red
Battery alarm indication
OFF: Normal
ON: Alarm
SD ACCESS
SD memory card status
ON: Accessing
Installation Manual
Green
2.3.2
MEC Card
Function
Memory expansion card for Broadcasting features and to double the number of DPTs, using
Digital XDP connection. To be mounted on the MPR card.
inside
Screw
MEC Card

User-supplied (not included): none
Installation Manual
73
2.3.3
RMT Card
Function
Analogue modem card for remote communication with the Hybrid IP-PBX. V90 support. To be
mounted on the MPR card.
inside
Screw
RMT Card

74
Installation Manual
2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
2.4
Installation of the Trunk Cards KXTDA100/KX-TDA200
2.4.1
LCOT4, LCOT8, and LCOT16 Cards
Function
LCOT4:
LCOT8:
4-port analogue trunk card with 2 power failure transfer (PFT) ports.
8-port analogue trunk card with 2 power failure transfer (PFT) ports. One CID8 or
CID/PAY8 card can be mounted on the LCOT8 card (refer to "2.4.3 CID/PAY8
Card" and "2.4.4 CID8 Card").
LCOT16: 16-port analogue trunk card with 4 power failure transfer (PFT) ports. A maximum
of 2 CID8 and CID/PAY8 cards can be mounted on the LCOT16 card (refer to
"2.4.3 CID/PAY8 Card" and "2.4.4 CID8 Card").
LED
Amphenol
To trunk

User-supplied (not included): Amphenol connector
Notes
To connect the Amphenol connector, refer to "2.2.10 Fastening Amphenol Type

Connector".
For details about power failure transfer, refer to "2.12.1 Power Failure Connections".
To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "2.13.1
Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX".
Installation Manual
75
Pin Assignments
Amphenol Connector
50
26
25
No. Signal Name Function
RA
Ring port 1
26
TA
Tip port 1
RB
Ring port 2
27
TB
Tip port 2
RC
Ring port 3
28
TC
Tip port 3
RD
Ring port 4
29
TD
Tip port 4
RE
Ring port 5
30
TE
Tip port 5
RF
Ring port 6
31
TF
Tip port 6
RG
Ring port 7
32
TG
Tip port 7
RH
Ring port 8
33
TH
Tip port 8
RI
Ring port 9
34
TI
Tip port 9
10
RJ
Ring port 10
35
TJ
Tip port 10
11
RK
Ring port 11
36
TK
Tip port 11
12
RL
Ring port 12
37
TL
Tip port 12
13
RM
Ring port 13
38
TM
Tip port 13
14
RN
Ring port 14
39
TN
Tip port 14
15
RO
Ring port 15
40
TO
Tip port 15
16
RP
Ring port 16
41
TP
Tip port 16
42- Reserved
50
17- Reserved
25
Notes
Pin assignments for the pins 5 to 8 and 30 to 33 are for the LCOT8 and LCOT16 card
only.
Pin assignments for the pins 9 to 16 and 34 to 41 are for the LCOT16 card only.
LED Indications
76
Indication
Colour
Description
CARD
STATUS
Green/
Red
Card status indication
OFF: Power Off
Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)
Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)
Red ON: Fault (includes reset)
Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service
Installation Manual
2.4.2
DID8 Card
Function
8-port DID trunk card.
LED
Amphenol
To DID line

Notes

Connector".
Installation Manual
77
Pin Assignments
Amphenol Connector
50
26
25
RA
Ring port 1
26
TA
Tip port 1
RB
Ring port 2
27
TB
Tip port 2
RC
Ring port 3
28
TC
Tip port 3
RD
Ring port 4
29
TD
Tip port 4
RE
Ring port 5
30
TE
Tip port 5
RF
Ring port 6
31
TF
Tip port 6
RG
Ring port 7
32
TG
Tip port 7
RH
Ring port 8
33
TH
Tip port 8
925
Reserved
34- Reserved
50
LED Indications
78
Indication
Colour
Description
CARD
STATUS
Green/
Red
OFF: Power Off
Installation Manual
2.4.3
CID/PAY8 Card
Function
8-port Caller ID signal type FSK/FSK (with Call Waiting Caller ID [Visual Caller ID])/DTMF, and
8 ports of Pay Tone Service (12 kHz/16 kHz). To be mounted on the LCOT8/LCOT16 cards.
Set all DIP switches for ports

09-16 at "OFF" positions
(LCOT16 card only).
inside
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW2
SW2
Ports 09-16
CID/PAY8 Card
Screw
Ports 01-08
SW1
SW1
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Set all DIP switches for

ports 01-08 at "OFF"
positions.

Note
Only 1 CID/PAY8 card can be mounted on the LCOT8 card.
Switch Settings (on LCOT8/LCOT16 cards)

Switch
Type
Usage and Status Definition
Port Setting
DIP
Set all DIP switches at "OFF" positions.

Note
SW2 is for the LCOT16 card only.
Installation Manual
79
2.4.4
CID8 Card
Function
8-port Caller ID signal type FSK/FSK (with Call Waiting Caller ID [Visual Caller ID])/DTMF. To
be mounted on the LCOT8/LCOT16 cards.
LCOT16 card only

OFF
inside
ON
SW2
CID8 Card
Screw
SW1
ON
OFF

Note
Only 1 CID8 card can be mounted on the LCOT8 card.
Switch Settings (on LCOT8/LCOT16 cards)

Switch
Type
Port Setting
DIP
Keep all DIP switches at default "ON" positions. Do not

change the positions of these switches.
Note
SW2 is for the LCOT16 card only.
80
Installation Manual
2.4.5
E&M8 Card
Function
8-port E & M (TIE) trunk card. Type 5 support.
LED
Amphenol
To terminal board from the E & M (TIE) line

Notes
Connect this optional service card to the trunk through terminal board from the E & M
(TIE) line; do not connect to the trunk directly.
Connector".
Installation Manual
81
Pin Assignments
Amphenol Connector
50
26
82
25
TA
Tip port 1
26
RA
Ring port 1
T1A
Tip 1 port 1
27
R1A
Ring 1 port 1
EA
E line port 1
28
MA
M line port 1
SGA
SG line port 1
29
SGB
SG line port 2
TB
Tip port 2
30
RB
Ring port 2
T1B
Tip 1 port 2
31
R1B
Ring 1 port 2
EB
E line port 2
32
MB
M line port 2
TC
Tip port 3
33
RC
Ring port 3
T1C
Tip 1 port 3
34
R1C
Ring 1 port 3
10
EC
E line port 3
35
MC
M line port 3
11
TD
Tip port 4
36
RD
Ring port 4
12
T1D
Tip 1 port 4
37
R1D
Ring 1 port 4
13
ED
E line port 4
38
MD
M line port 4
14
TE
Tip port 5
39
RE
Ring port 5
15
T1E
Tip 1 port 5
40
R1E
Ring 1 port 5
16
EE
E line port 5
41
ME
M line port 5
17
TF
Tip port 6
42
RF
Ring port 6
18
T1F
Tip 1 port 6
43
R1F
Ring 1 port 6
19
EF
E line port 6
44
MF
M line port 6
20
TG
Tip port 7
45
RG
Ring port 7
21
T1G
Tip 1 port 7
46
R1G
Ring 1 port 7
22
EG
E line port 7
47
MG
M line port 7
23
TH
Tip port 8
48
RH
Ring port 8
24
T1H
Tip 1 port 8
49
R1H
Ring 1 port 8
25
EH
E line port 8
50
MH
M line port 8
Installation Manual
LED Indications
Indication
Colour
Description
CARD
STATUS
Green/
Red
OFF: Power Off
Installation Manual
83
2.4.6
T1 Card
Function
1-port T1 trunk card. EIA/TIA standard compliant.
LEDs
RJ45
To NT1 / Extension

Accessory (included): Ferrite core 1
User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector
Notes
When connecting this optional service card to the trunk, connect through NT1; do not
connect to the trunk directly.
When connecting the RJ45 connector, attach the included ferrite core (except in
Canada, where the ferrite core is not necessarily required). Refer to "2.2.9 Attaching
a Ferrite Core".
This optional service card can be used for either trunk or extension connection, by
setting the A/B switch or using the connector with appropriate pin assignments.
CAUTION
T1 ports are SELV ports and should only be connected to SELV services.
Switch Settings
84
Switch
Type
A/B
Slide
Select A (default) for trunk or B for extension use.
Installation Manual
Pin Assignments
RJ45 Connector for Trunk Use
No. Signal Name
Level [V]
Function
RX+
(+)
Receive data (+)
RX-
(-)
Receive data (-)
Reserved
TX-
(-)
Transmit data (-)
TX+
(+)
Transmit data (+)
No. Signal Name
Level [V]
Function
TX-
(-)
Transmit data (-)
TX+
(+)
Transmit data (+)
Reserved
RX+
(+)
Receive data (+)
RX-
(-)
Receive data (-)
6-8 Reserved
6-8 Reserved
RJ45 Connector for Extension Use
LED Indications
Indication
Colour
Description
CARD
STATUS
Green/
Red
OFF: Power Off
SYNC-ERR
Red
Non-synchronisation status indication
OFF: Normal
ON: Out of synchronisation
RAI
Red
RAI signal status indication
OFF: Normal
ON: Alarm (Clock Slave)
Flashing (60 times per minute): Alarm (Clock Master)
AIS
Red
AIS status indication
OFF: Normal
ON: Alarm
Installation Manual
85
Indication
Colour
Description
SYNC
Green
Synchronisation status indication
OFF: Not synchronised
ON: Synchronised
Flashing (60 times per minute): Synchronised (Clock Master)
Maximum Cabling Distance of Extension Connection

The maximum distance of the extension cable that connects the T1 cards is shown below:
Diameter
0.5 mm:
86
Installation Manual
Maximum Distance
Under 200 m
2.4.7
E1 Card
Function
1-port E1 trunk card. ITU-T standard compliant.
A
LEDs
B
RJ45
BNC (TX) outer conductor

J308
J308
OR
3
1 2
To NT1/Extension
For Frame
Ground Open
To NT1/Extension
For RJ45
For Frame
Ground Short
3
J309
OR
2 1
75
J309
OR
2 1
120
BNC (TX)
BNC (RX)
120
For BNC
3
1 2
75
BNC (RX) outer conductor

User-supplied (not included): RJ45 or BNC connector
Notes
In some countries/areas, this optional service card must not be connected to the
Public Switched Telephone Network.
When connecting this optional service card to the trunk, connect through NT1; do not
connect to the trunk directly.
Use only 1 type of connector (RJ45 or BNC) for connection; RJ45 and BNC cannot
be used simultaneously.
When connecting the RJ45 connector, attach the included ferrite core. Refer to "2.2.9
Attaching a Ferrite Core".
CAUTION
E1 ports are SELV ports and should only be connected to SELV services.
Installation Manual
87
Switch Settings
Switch
Type
Termination
Slide
Select 120
used.
A/B
Slide
When using an RJ45 connector, select A (default) for trunk

or B for extension use.
When using BNC connectors, keep the A position.
Frame Ground
Short
Short pin
J308 is for BNC (TX) outer conductor, and J309 is for BNC
(RX) outer conductor.
(default) or 75
for connector type to be
Connection of 1 and 2: Open (default)

Connection of 2 and 3: Short
Pin Assignments
No. Signal Name
Level [V]
Function
RX+
(+)
Receive data (+)
RX-
(-)
Receive data (-)
Reserved
TX-
(-)
Transmit data (-)
TX+
(+)
Transmit data (+)
No. Signal Name
Level [V]
Function
TX-
(-)
Transmit data (-)
TX+
(+)
Transmit data (+)
Reserved
RX+
(+)
Receive data (+)
RX-
(-)
Receive data (-)
6-8 Reserved
No. Signal Name
Level [V]
Function
TX+
(+)
Transmit data (+)
TX-
(-)
Transmit data (-)
6-8 Reserved
RJ45 Connector for Extension use
BNC (coaxial) Connector (TX)
88
Installation Manual
BNC (coaxial) Connector (RX)

No. Signal Name
Level [V]
Function
RX-
(-)
Receive data (-)
RX+
(+)
Receive data (+)
LED Indications
Indication
Colour
Description
CARD
STATUS
Green/
Red
OFF: Power Off
SYNC-ERR
Red
OFF: Normal
RAI
Red
OFF: Normal
AIS
Red
OFF: Normal
ON: Alarm
SYNC
Green
ON: Synchronised

The maximum distance of the extension cable that connects the E1 cards is shown below:
Diameter
0.5 mm:
Maximum Distance
Under 200 m
Installation Manual
89
2.4.8
BRI4 and BRI8 Cards
Function
BRI4: 4-port ISDN Basic Rate Interface card with 1 power failure transfer port. EURO-ISDN/
ETSI compliant.
BRI8: 8-port ISDN Basic Rate Interface card with 1 power failure transfer port. EURO-ISDN/
ETSI compliant.
LEDs
RJ45
(LINE 1 to LINE 8)
To NT1/ Extension

Accessory (included): Ferrite core(s) 1 (BRI4 card) or 2 (BRI8 card)
Notes
LINE 5 to LINE 8 are for BRI8 card only.

When connecting these optional service cards to the trunk, connect through an NT1;
do not connect to the U interface of the trunk directly.
These optional service cards have 100
of terminal resistance. For use in point to
multi-point connection, the cards must be placed at the end of the bus.
These optional service cards can be used for either trunk or extension connection, by
Notice
If the connected ISDN terminal has no external power source, make sure that the power
is supplied from the BRI4/BRI8 card by programming the Hybrid IP-PBX accordingly.
However, if there is an external power source to the terminal, make sure that there is no
power supplied to the terminal from the BRI4/BRI8 card. Failure to do so may cause
damage to the power supply circuit of the BRI4/BRI8 card or the terminal.
90
Installation Manual
Switch Settings
Switch
Type
A/B
Slide
Pin Assignments
No. Signal Name
Level [V]
Function
1-2 Reserved
TX1
(+)
Transmit data 1
RX2
(+)
Receive data 2
RX1
(-)
Receive data 1
TX2
(-)
Transmit data 2
7-8 Reserved
No. Signal Name
Level [V]
Function
1-2 Reserved
RX2
(+)
Receive data 2
TX1
(+)
Transmit data 1
TX2
(-)
Transmit data 2
RX1
(-)
Receive data 1
7-8 Reserved
LED Indications
Indication
Colour
Description
CARD
STATUS
Green/
Red
OFF: Power Off
Installation Manual
91
Indication
Colour
Description
LINE 8
LINE 7
LINE 6
LINE 5
LINE 4
LINE 3
LINE 2
LINE 1
Green
Line status indication (LINE 1 to LINE 8):

Refer to "LINE LED Pattern" below for details.
Note
LINE 5 to LINE 8 are for BRI8 card only.
LINE LED Pattern

L1
L2
Master
Clock
LED Pattern
OFF
OFF
OFF
1s
ON
OFF
OFF
1s
ON
ON
OFF
1s
ON
OFF
ON
1s
ON
ON
ON
1s
L1: ON (Synchronous)
L2: ON (Link established)/OFF (Link not established)
Master Clock: ON (Master)/OFF (Slave)
92
Installation Manual
Maximum Cabling Distance of S0 Bus Connection

The maximum distance of the extension cable that connects the Hybrid IP-PBX and the ISDN
terminal equipment (TE) is shown below:
CAT 5: Under 1000 m
Point-to-Point
TE
CAT 5: Under 150 m
TE 1
CAT 5: Under 500 m
TE 1
Point-to-Multipoint
TE 8
CAT 5: Under 50 m
Expansion
Point-to-Multipoint
TE 8
Installation Manual
93
2.4.9
PRI30 Card
Function
1-port ISDN Primary Rate Interface card (30B channels). EURO-ISDN/ETSI compliant.
LEDs
RJ45
To NT1 / Extension
To NT1/Extension
For RJ45
120
120
BNC (TX)
BNC (RX)
OR
For BNC
75
75

User-supplied (not included): RJ45 or BNC connector
Notes
In some countries/areas, this optional service card must not be connected to the
Public Switched Telephone Network.
When connecting this optional service card to the trunk, connect through an NT1; do
not connect to the U interface of the trunk directly.
Use only 1 type of connector (RJ45 or BNC) for connection; RJ45 and BNC cannot
be used simultaneously.
CAUTION
PRI ports are SELV ports and should only be connected to SELV services.
94
Installation Manual
Switch Settings
Switch
Type
Termination
Slide
Select 120
used.
A/B
Slide
When using an RJ45 connector, select A (default) for trunk

or B for extension use.
When using BNC connectors, keep the A position.
(default) or 75
for connector type to be
Pin Assignments
No. Signal Name
Level [V]
Function
RX+
(+)
Receive data (+)
RX-
(-)
Receive data (-)
Reserved
TX-
(-)
Transmit data (-)
TX+
(+)
Transmit data (+)
No. Signal Name
Level [V]
Function
TX-
(-)
Transmit data (-)
TX+
(+)
Transmit data (+)
Reserved
RX+
(+)
Receive data (+)
RX-
(-)
Receive data (-)
6-8 Reserved
No. Signal Name
Level [V]
Function
TX+
(+)
Transmit data (+)
TX-
(-)
Transmit data (-)
6-8 Reserved
BNC (coaxial) Connector (TX)
Installation Manual
95
BNC (coaxial) Connector (RX)

No. Signal Name
Level [V]
Function
RX-
(-)
Receive data (-)
RX+
(+)
Receive data (+)
LED Indications
96
Indication
Colour
Description
CARD
STATUS
Green/
Red
OFF: Power Off
SYNC-ERR
Red
OFF: Normal
RAI
Red
OFF: Normal
AIS
Red
OFF: Normal
ON: Alarm
SYNC
Green
ON: Synchronised
D-LINK
Green
Data link status indication
OFF: Not established
ON: Established
Installation Manual

The maximum distance of the extension cable that connects the PRI30 cards is shown below:
Diameter
0.5 mm:
Maximum Distance
Under 200 m
Installation Manual
97
2.4.10 PRI23 Card

Function
1-port ISDN Primary Rate Interface card (23B channels). NI (North American standard ISDN
protocol) compliant.
LEDs
RJ45
To NT1/ Extension

Notes
When connecting the RJ45 connector, attach the included ferrite core (except in
Canada, where the ferrite core is not necessarily required). Refer to "2.2.9 Attaching
a Ferrite Core".
CAUTION
PRI ports are SELV ports and should only be connected to SELV services.
Switch Settings
98
Switch
Type
A/B
Slide
Installation Manual
Pin Assignments
No. Signal Name
Level [V]
Function
RX+
(+)
Receive data (+)
RX-
(-)
Receive data (-)
Reserved
TX-
(-)
Transmit data (-)
TX+
(+)
Transmit data (+)
No. Signal Name
Level [V]
Function
TX-
(-)
Transmit data (-)
TX+
(+)
Transmit data (+)
Reserved
RX+
(+)
Receive data (+)
RX-
(-)
Receive data (-)
6-8 Reserved
6-8 Reserved
LED Indications
Indication
Colour
Description
CARD
STATUS
Green/
Red
OFF: Power Off
SYNC-ERR
Red
OFF: Normal
RAI
Red
OFF: Normal
AIS
Red
OFF: Normal
ON: Alarm
Installation Manual
99
Indication
Colour
Description
SYNC
Green
ON: Synchronised
D-LINK
Green
Data link status indication
OFF: Not established
ON: Established

The maximum distance of the extension cable that connects the PRI23 cards is shown below:
Diameter
0.5 mm:
100
Installation Manual
Maximum Distance
Under 200 m
2.4.11 IP-GW4 Card

Function
4-channel VoIP gateway card. VoIP H.323 V.2, ITU-T G.729a, and G.723.1 compliant. G3 fax
support.
LEDs
RJ45 (10BASE-T)
To private IP network

Accessory (included): CD-ROM (including PC programming software and
documentation) 1
Notes
Maximum length of the cable to be connected to this optional service card is 100 m.
The IP-GW4 card occupies the space of 2 free slots when it is installed in the Hybrid
IP-PBX.
For programming instructions and other information about the IP-GW4 card, refer to
the documentation for the IP-GW4 card. To programme the IP-GW4 card, use the PC
programming software designed for the IP-GW4 card.
Installation Manual
101
Pin Assignments
RJ45 Connector (10BASE-T)
No. Signal Name
Input (I)/Output (O)
Function
TPO+
Transmit data+
TPO-
Transmit data-
TPI+
Receive data+
4-5 Reserved
TPI-
Receive data-
7-8 Reserved
LED Indications
102
Indication
Colour
Description
CARD
STATUS
Green/
Red
OFF: Power Off
ONLINE
Green
On-line status indication
ON: On-line mode
Flashing: Emergency maintenance mode
ALARM
Red
Alarm indication
OFF: Normal
ON: Alarm
IAM BUSY
Green
Busy status indication
OFF: Not used
ON: At least one line is used
LINK
Green
Link status indication
OFF: Connection error
ON: Normal connection
DATA
Green
Data transmission indication
OFF: No data transmitted
ON: Data transmitting
COL
Green
Data collision indication
OFF: No data collision
ON: Data collision
Installation Manual
Indication
Colour
Description
SIOSEL
Green
Serial maintenance port status indication
OFF: CPU power port used (maintenance port not available)
ON: Maintenance port available
Installation Manual
103
2.4.12 IP-GW4E Card

Function
4-channel VoIP gateway card. VoIP H.323 V.2, ITU-T G.729a, G.723.1, and G.711 compliant.
LEDs
RJ45
(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
To private IP network

Accessory (included): CD-ROM (including documentation for web programming) 1
Notes
The IP-GW4E card occupies the space of only 1 free slot when it is installed in the
Hybrid IP-PBX.
For programming instructions and other information about the IP-GW4E card, refer to
the documentation for the IP-GW4E card. To programme the IP-GW4E card, use the
web programming designed for the IP-GW4E card.
Pin Assignments
RJ45 Connector (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
104
Installation Manual
No. Signal Name
Function
TPO+
Transmit data+
TPO-
Transmit data-
TPI+
Receive data+
4-5 Reserved
TPI-
Receive data-
7-8 Reserved
LED Indications
Indication
Colour
Description
CARD
STATUS
Green/
Red
OFF: Power Off
ONLINE
Green
ON: On-line mode
OFF: Off-line mode
Flashing: Maintenance mode

Note
If the LINK indicator is OFF, the ONLINE indicator will also be
OFF.
ALARM
Red
Alarm indication
OFF: Normal
ON: Alarm
VoIP BUSY
Green
VoIP (H.323) process indication
OFF: VoIP process inactive
ON: VoIP process active
LINK
Green
OFF: Connection error
ON: Normal connection
DATA
Green
Installation Manual
105
2.5 Installation of the Extension Cards KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
2.5
Installation of the Extension Cards KXTDA100/KX-TDA200
2.5.1
CSIF4 and CSIF8 Card
Function
CSIF4: 4-port CS interface card for 4 CSs.
CSIF8: 8-port CS interface card for 8 CSs.
LED
RJ45
(LINE 1 to LINE 8)
To CS

Accessory (included): none
Notes
106
Installation Manual
LINE 5 to LINE 8 are for CSIF8 card only.

When using the CSIF4 card, please note that the Hybrid IP-PBX software will
recognise the CSIF4 card as the CSIF8 card. As a result, 8 cell stations may appear
to be available; however, only 4 cell stations are supported by the CSIF4 card.
For details about connecting the CS, refer to "2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the
Hybrid IP-PBX" in "2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations KX-TDA100/KXTDA200" or "2.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX" in "2.9 Connection
of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200".
Pin Assignments
RJ45 Connector
No. Signal Name
Function
1-2 Reserved
D1
Data port (High)
POWH
Power (High)
POWL
Power (Low)
D2
Data port (Low)
7-8 Reserved
LED Indications
Indication
Colour
Description
CARD
STATUS
Green/
Red
OFF: Power Off
Installation Manual
107
2.5.2
DHLC8 Card
Function
8-port digital hybrid extension card for DPTs, APTs, SLTs, DSS consoles, and PT-interface
CSs, with 2 power failure transfer (PFT) ports.
LED
Amphenol
To extensions

Accessory (included): Screws 2, Ferrite core 1
Notes
108
Installation Manual
Attach the included ferrite core to the cable. Refer to "2.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core".
Connector".
Pin Assignments
Amphenol Connector
50
26
25
RA
SLT Ring port 1
26
TA
SLT Tip port 1
D2A
PT Data port 1 (Low)
27
D1A
PT Data port 1 (High)
Reserved
28
Reserved
RB
SLT Ring port 2
29
TB
SLT Tip port 2
D2B
30
D1B
Reserved
31
Reserved
RC
SLT Ring port 3
32
TC
SLT Tip port 3
D2C
33
D1C
Reserved
34
Reserved
10
RD
SLT Ring port 4
35
TD
SLT Tip port 4
11
D2D
36
D1D
12
Reserved
37
Reserved
13
RE
SLT Ring port 5
38
TE
SLT Tip port 5
14
D2E
39
D1E
15
Reserved
40
Reserved
16
RF
SLT Ring port 6
41
TF
SLT Tip port 6
17
D2F
42
D1F
18
Reserved
43
Reserved
19
RG
SLT Ring port 7
44
TG
SLT Tip port 7
20
D2G
45
D1G
21
Reserved
46
Reserved
22
RH
SLT Ring port 8
47
TH
SLT Tip port 8
23
D2H
48
D1H
49- Reserved
50
24- Reserved
25
Installation Manual
109
LED Indications
110
Indication
Colour
Description
CARD
STATUS
Green/
Orange/
Red
OFF: Power Off
Orange Flashing: Detection of PT-interface CS connection

(when starting up the PT-interface CS)
Installation Manual
2.5.3
DLC8 Card
Function
8-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSS consoles, and PT-interface CSs.
LED
Amphenol
To extensions

Notes
Connector".
Installation Manual
111
Pin Assignments
Amphenol Connector
50
26
25
Reserved
26
Reserved
D2A
Data port 1 (Low)
27
D1A
Data port 1 (High)
3-4 Reserved
28- Reserved
29
Data port 2 (Low)
30
Data port 2 (High)
6-7 Reserved
31- Reserved
32
D2C
Data port 3 (Low)
33
Data port 3 (High)
910
Reserved
34- Reserved
35
11
D2D
Data port 4 (Low)
36
Data port 4 (High)
12- Reserved
13
37- Reserved
38
14
Data port 5 (Low)
39
Data port 5 (High)
15- Reserved
16
40- Reserved
41
17
Data port 6 (Low)
42
Data port 6 (High)
18- Reserved
19
43- Reserved
44
20
Data port 7 (Low)
45
Data port 7 (High)
21- Reserved
22
46- Reserved
47
23
Data port 8 (Low)
48
Data port 8 (High)
49- Reserved
50
D2B
D2E
D2F
D2G
D2H
24- Reserved
25
D1B
D1C
D1D
D1E
D1F
D1G
D1H
LED Indications
112
Indication
Colour
Description
CARD
STATUS
Green/
Orange/
Red
OFF: Power Off

Installation Manual
2.5.4
DLC16 Card
Function
16-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSS consoles, and PT-interface CSs.
LED
Amphenol
To extensions

Notes
Connector".
Installation Manual
113
Pin Assignments
Amphenol Connector
50
26
25
D2A
Data port 1 (Low)
26
D1A
Data port 1 (High)
D2B
Data port 2 (Low)
27
D1B
Data port 2 (High)
D2C
Data port 3 (Low)
28
D1C
Data port 3 (High)
D2D
Data port 4 (Low)
29
D1D
Data port 4 (High)
D2E
Data port 5 (Low)
30
D1E
Data port 5 (High)
D2F
Data port 6 (Low)
31
D1F
Data port 6 (High)
D2G
Data port 7 (Low)
32
D1G
Data port 7 (High)
D2H
Data port 8 (Low)
33
D1H
Data port 8 (High)
D2I
Data port 9 (Low)
34
D1I
Data port 9 (High)
10
D2J
Data port 10 (Low)
35
D1J
Data port 10 (High)
11
D2K
Data port 11 (Low)
36
D1K
Data port 11 (High)
12
D2L
Data port 12 (Low)
37
D1L
Data port 12 (High)
13
D2M
Data port 13 (Low)
38
D1M
Data port 13 (High)
14
D2N
Data port 14 (Low)
39
D1N
Data port 14 (High)
15
D2O
Data port 15 (Low)
40
D1O
Data port 15 (High)
16
D2P
Data port 16 (Low)
41
D1P
Data port 16 (High)
42- Reserved
50
17- Reserved
25
LED Indications
114
Indication
Colour
Description
CARD
STATUS
Green/
Orange/
Red
OFF: Power Off

Installation Manual
2.5.5
SLC8 Card
Function
8-port extension card for SLTs with 2 power failure transfer (PFT) ports.
LED
Amphenol
To extensions

Notes
Connector".
Installation Manual
115
Pin Assignments
Amphenol Connector
50
26
25
Ring port 1
26
2-3 Reserved
27- Reserved
28
Ring port 2
29
Tip port 2
5-6 Reserved
30- Reserved
31
Ring port 3
32
Tip port 3
8-9 Reserved
33- Reserved
34
10
Ring port 4
35
Tip port 4
11- Reserved
12
36- Reserved
37
13
Ring port 5
38
Tip port 5
14- Reserved
15
39- Reserved
40
16
Ring port 6
41
Tip port 6
17- Reserved
18
43- Reserved
44
19
Ring port 7
44
Tip port 7
20- Reserved
21
45- Reserved
46
22
Ring port 8
47
Tip port 8
48- Reserved
50
RA
RB
RC
RD
RE
RF
RG
RH
23- Reserved
25
TA
TB
TC
TD
TE
TF
TG
TH
Tip port 1
LED Indications
116
Indication
Colour
Description
CARD
STATUS
Green/
Red
OFF: Power Off
Installation Manual
2.5.6
SLC16 and MSLC16 Cards
Function
SLC16:
16-port extension card for SLTs with 4 power failure transfer (PFT) ports.
MSLC16: 16-port extension card for SLTs with Message Waiting Lamp control and 4 power
failure transfer (PFT) ports. Maximum power output of 160 V/90 V for Message
Waiting Lamp control.
LED
Amphenol
To extensions

Notes
Panasonic SLT with Message Waiting Lamp (e.g., KX-T7310) is recommended for
connection to the MSLC16 card.
Connector".
Installation Manual
117
Pin Assignments
Amphenol Connector
50
26
25
RA
Ring port 1
26
TA
Tip port 1
RB
Ring port 2
27
TB
Tip port 2
RC
Ring port 3
28
TC
Tip port 3
RD
Ring port 4
29
TD
Tip port 4
RE
Ring port 5
30
TE
Tip port 5
RF
Ring port 6
31
TF
Tip port 6
RG
Ring port 7
32
TG
Tip port 7
RH
Ring port 8
33
TH
Tip port 8
RI
Ring port 9
34
TI
Tip port 9
10
RJ
Ring port 10
35
TJ
Tip port 10
11
RK
Ring port 11
36
TK
Tip port 11
12
RL
Ring port 12
37
TL
Tip port 12
13
RM
Ring port 13
38
TM
Tip port 13
14
RN
Ring port 14
39
TN
Tip port 14
15
RO
Ring port 15
40
TO
Tip port 15
16
RP
Ring port 16
41
TP
Tip port 16
42- Reserved
50
17- Reserved
25
LED Indications
118
Indication
Colour
Description
CARD
STATUS
Green/
Red
OFF: Power Off
Installation Manual
2.6 Installation of the Other Cards KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
2.6
Installation of the Other Cards KXTDA100/KX-TDA200
2.6.1
OPB3 Card
Function
Optional 3-slot base card for mounting a maximum of 3 option cards from the following:
DPH4 card
DPH2 card
ECHO16 card
MSG4 card
LED
CAUTION
A LITHIUM BATTERY IS USED IN OPB3 CARD. THERE IS A RISK OF EXPLOSION IF
BATTERY IS REPLACED WITH THE INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED
BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
LED Indications
Indication
Colour
Description
CARD
STATUS
Green/
Red
OFF: Power Off
Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in

use)
Installation Manual
119
2.6.2
DPH4 Card
Function
4-port doorphone card for 4 doorphones and 4 door openers. To be mounted on the OPB3
card.
Fully insert the connectors through

the panel openings.
OPB3 Card
DPH4 Card
8-pin
Screw
To doorphones
To door openers
10-pin

Accessory (included): Screws 3, 10-pin terminal block 1, 8-pin terminal block 1
User-supplied (not included): Copper wire
Notes
120
Installation Manual
Maximum of 3 DPH4 cards can be mounted on the OPB3 card.

For details about connection to doorphones and door openers, refer to "2.10.1
Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers".
Pin Assignments
8-pin Terminal Block
No. Signal Name
Function
DP4
Doorphone 4 transmit
com4
Doorphone 4 receive
DP3
com3
Doorphone 3 receive
DP2
com2
Doorphone 2 receive
DP1
com1
Doorphone 1 receive
10
No. Signal Name
Function
1-2 Reserved
OP4b
Door opener 4
OP4a
Door opener 4 com
OP3b
Door opener 3
OP3a
Door opener 3 com
OP2b
Door opener 2
OP2a
Door opener 2 com
OP1b
Door opener 1
10
OP1a
Door opener 1 com
Installation Manual
121
2.6.3
DPH2 Card
Function
2-port doorphone card for 2 German type doorphones and 2 door openers. To be mounted on
the OPB3 card.
Fully insert the connectors through

the panel openings.
OPB3 Card
DPH2 Card
8-pin
Screw
To doorphones/
door openers
10-pin

Accessory (included): Screws 3, 10-pin terminal block 1, 8-pin terminal block 1
Notes
122
Installation Manual
Maximum of 3 DPH2 cards can be mounted on the OPB3 card.

For details about connection to doorphones and door openers, refer to "2.10.1
Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers".
Pin Assignments
No. Signal Name
Function
Path_2b
Path_2a
Doorphone 2 receive
Call_2b
Doorphone 2 call button
Call_2a
Doorphone 2 call button com
Path_1b
Path_1a
Doorphone 1 receive
Call_1b
Call_1a
10
No. Signal Name
Function
1-2 Reserved
OP2b
Door opener 2
OP2a
Door opener 2 com
OP1b
Door opener 1
OP1a
Door opener 1 com
DC2b
Doorphone control 2
DC2a
Doorphone control 2 com
DC1b
Doorphone control 1
10
DC1a
Installation Manual
123
Connection Chart for German Type Doorphones and Door Openers

German Type Doorphone 2
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
RT
Door
Opener 2
BL
Call_2b
L O U B
Call_2a
~0 V L O U B~12 V~8 V TO
Path_2a
Path_2b
DC2b
DC2a
OP2b
Doorphone 2
Adaptor
220 V~
German Type Doorphone 1

RT
Door
Opener 1
BL
Call_1a
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
L O U B
Call_1b
~0 V L O U B~12 V~8 V TO
Path_1a
Path_1b
DC1b
DC1a
OP1b
OP1a
Doorphone 1
Adaptor
220 V~
124
Installation Manual
BL: Light
RT: Call Button
OP: Door Opener Connection Terminal
DC: Doorphone Current Supply Control Terminal
Path: Doorphone Call Path
: Speaker
: Microphone
: Shield
2.6.4
ECHO16 Card
Function
16-channel card for echo cancellation during conferences. To be mounted on the OPB3 card.
OPB3 Card
inside
ECHO16 Card
Screw

Notes
To establish a conference call involving 6 to 8 parties, install an ECHO16 card and

enable the echo cancellation for conference using the KX-TDA Maintenance Console
(refer to "3.3.3 Hybrid IP-PBX Configuration").
Only 1 ECHO16 card can be mounted on the OPB3 card.
Installation Manual
125
2.6.5
MSG4 Card
Function
4-channel message card. To be mounted on the OPB3 card.
OPB3 Card
inside
MSG4 Card
Screw

Note
Maximum of 3 MSG4 cards can be mounted on the OPB3 card.
126
Installation Manual
2.6.6
CTI-LINK Card
Function
Ethernet card for CTI communication via 10BASE-T port. CSTA Phase 3 protocol compatible.
LEDs
RJ45 (10BASE-T)
To LAN/
Server PC

Notes
This optional service card can be connected to PCs on a LAN via a Server PC to
provide third party call control CTI.
The operating system of the PC or Server PC required for third party call control
depends on your CTI application software. For details, refer to the manual for your CTI
application software.
Pin Assignments
RJ45 Connector (10BASE-T)
No. Signal Name
Function
TPO+
Transmit data+
TPO-
Transmit data-
TPI+
Receive data+
4-5 Reserved
TPI-
Receive data-
7-8 Reserved
Installation Manual
127
LED Indications
Indication
Colour
Description
CARD
STATUS
Green/
Red
OFF: Power Off
Green ON: Normal
LINK STATUS Green
128
Installation Manual
Flashing: In communication
ON: In normal linking
2.7 Connection of Extensions KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
2.7
Connection of Extensions KX-TDA100/

KX-TDA200
2.7.1
Maximum Cabling Distances of the Extension Wiring

(Twisted Cable)
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
Maximum Distance
Under 222 m
Under 347 m
Under 500 m
Under 347 m
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
Maximum Distance
Under 500 m
Under 720 m
Under 830 m
Under 720 m
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
Maximum Distance
Under 140 m
Under 229 m
Under 360 m
Under 229 m
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
Maximum Distance
Under 698 m
Under 1128 m
Under 1798 m
Under 1128 m
PT-interface
CS
DPT
APT
PT-interface CS
KX-T7600 Series
Other PT and
DSS Console
SLT
DSS Console
SLT
DHLC8 Card
MSLC16, SLC16, SLC8
Cards
DLC16, DLC8 Cards
"
" indicates that the extension card supports the terminal.
Installation Manual
129
2.7.2
Parallel Connection of the Extensions

Any SLT can be connected in parallel with an APT or a DPT as follows.
Note
In addition to an SLT, an answering machine, a fax machine or a modem (PC) can be
connected in parallel with an APT or a DPT.
With APT
To DHLC8 card
Modular
T-Adaptor
2-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "T" and "R".
Connect pins "T", "R", "D1",
and "D2".
APT
SLT
With DPT
Parallel mode or eXtra Device Port (XDP) mode can be selected through system programming.
If the XDP mode is enabled through system programming, parallel connection is not possible.
Refer to "1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone" and "2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration" in the Feature
Guide for further information.
Using a Modular T-Adaptor

To DHLC8 card
Modular
T-Adaptor
Connect pins "D1" and
"D2".
DPT
130
Installation Manual
SLT
Using an EXtra Device Port

With KX-T7600 Series DPT (except KX-T7665)
To DHLC8 card

Connect pins "T", "R",
"D1" and "D2".
DPT
SLT
TO MAIN UNIT TO TEL

/ PABX
To DHLC8 card
To SLT
With Other DPT (except KX-T7560 and KX-T7565)
To DHLC8 card

"D1" and "D2".
DPT
SLT
TO TEL
TO EMSS or TO MAIN UNIT
To DHLC8 card
To SLT
Installation Manual
131
2.7.3
Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection

A DPT can be connected to another DPT on the Digital XDP connection. In addition, if the DPT
is connected to a DHLC8 card, it can also have an SLT connected in Parallel mode or XDP
mode.
Notes
Both DPTs must be KX-T7600 series DPTs (excluding KX-T7640).

Parallel mode or XDP mode can be selected through system programming.
If XDP mode is enabled through system programming, parallel connection is not
possible. Refer to "1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone" and "2.1.1 Extension Port
Configuration" in the Feature Guide for further information.
With KX-T7600 Series DPT (except KX-T7600E Series)

To DLC8/DLC16 card
Modular
T-Adaptor
To DHLC8 card
(for connection of SLT)


Connect pins "D1" and "D2".

"D2".
SLT
Master DPT
Slave DPT
Back View of DPTs

TO TEL
TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
Maximum Distance
Under 30 m
Under 50 m
Under 60 m
Under 50 m
Master DPT
To DLC8/DLC16 card
To DHLC8 card
132
Installation Manual
Slave DPT
Using an Extra Device Port

To DLC8/DLC16 card
To DHLC8 card
"D1" and "D2".

Connect pins "T", "R", 2-conductor wiring cord
"D1" and "D2".
Master DPT
Slave DPT
SLT
Back View of DPTs

TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
TO TEL
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
Maximum Distance
Under 30 m
Under 50 m
Under 60 m
Under 50 m
TO TEL
Master DPT
To DLC8/DLC16 card
Slave DPT
To SLT
To DHLC8 card
Installation Manual
133
With KX-T7600E Series DPT

To DLC8/DLC16 card
Modular
T-Adaptor
To DHLC8 card



SLT
Master DPT
Slave DPT
Back View of DPTs

TO DIGITAL
TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
Maximum Distance
Under 30 m
Under 50 m
Under 60 m
Under 50 m
Master DPT
To DLC8/DLC16 card
To DHLC8 card
134
Installation Manual
Slave DPT

Connecting to a Slave DPT
To DLC8/DLC16 card
To DHLC8 card
"D1" and "D2".

"D1" and "D2".
Master DPT
Slave DPT
SLT
Back View of DPTs

TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
TO DIGITAL
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
Maximum Distance
Under 30 m
Under 50 m
Under 60 m
Under 50 m
TO TEL
Master DPT
To DLC8/DLC16 card
Slave DPT
To SLT
To DHLC8 card
Installation Manual
135
Connecting to a Master DPT
To DLC8/DLC16 card
To DHLC8 card


"D1" and "D2".
Master DPT
Slave DPT

SLT
Back View of DPTs
TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
To DLC8/DLC16 card
To DHLC8 card
To slave DPT
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
136
Installation Manual
Maximum Distance
Under 30 m
Under 50 m
Under 60 m
To SLT
Under 50 m
TO DIGITAL
TO TEL
First Party Call Control CTI Connection

CTI connection between a PC and a KX-T7633/T7636 DPT provides first party call control. The
CTI connection is made via a USB interface (version 1.1), and uses the CSTA Phase 3
protocol.
A USB Module (KX-T7601) must be connected to the KX-T7633/T7636 DPT.
Note
The operating system of the PC required for first party call control depends on your CTI
application software. For details, refer to the manual for your CTI application software.
To PC
USB Cable
USB Port
L
UL
2.7.4
USB Module
Notes
Maximum length of the USB cable is 3 m.

USB Modules must not be connected to DPTs in the Digital XDP connection. In a
Digital XDP connection, the PC cannot be used. If a USB module is connected to a
slave DPT, the DPT will not work properly.
Installation Manual
137
2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
2.8
Connection of DECT Portable Stations

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
2.8.1
Overview
The following equipment is required to connect the wireless system:
CS: Cell Station (KX-TDA0142CE/KX-TDA0141CE)

KX-TDA0142CE Using a CSIF Card
This unit determines the area covered by the wireless system. Up to 4 calls can be made
at the same time through each CS.
CSIF4 (KX-TDA0143)
One CSIF4 card supports up to 4 Cell Stations. Up to 2 CSIF4 cards can be
connected to the KX-TDA100, and up to 4 can be connected to the KX-TDA200.
CSIF8 (KX-TDA0144)
KX-TDA0141CE Using a DHLC/DLC Card
Note for users in Europe
This Cell Station Unit for DECT is for connection to a Panasonic PBX of a European
country.
PS: DECT Portable Station (KX-TCA155/KX-TCA255/KX-TD7590/KX-TD7580)

The KX-TDA100 and KX-TDA200 can support up to 128 PSs. For more details about the PS,
please refer to the PS Operating Instructions.
RF Specification
Item
Description
Radio Access Method
Multi Carrier TDMA-TDD
Frequency Band
1880 MHz to 1900 MHz*1
Number of Carriers
10*2
Carrier Spacing
1728 kHz
Bit Rate
1152 kbps
Carrier Multiplex
TDMA, 24 (Tx12, Rx12) slots per frame
Frame Length
10 ms
Modulation Scheme
GFSK
Roll-off factor=0.5
138
50 % roll-off in the transmitter
Data Coding for Modulator
Differential Coding
Voice CODEC
32 kbps ADPCM (CCITT G.721)
Installation Manual
Item
Transmission Output
*1
*2
Description
Average 10 mW
Peak 250 mW
The number may vary depending on the country/area. In Taiwan, it is 1880 MHz to 1895 MHz.
The number may vary depending on the country/area. In Taiwan, it is 8.
CAUTION
The CS should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40 C),
low temperature (less than 0 C), vibration, and should not be exposed to direct
sunlight.
The CS should not be placed outdoors (use indoors).
The CS should not be placed near high voltage equipment.
The CS should not be placed on a metal object.
Do not use this wireless system near another high power cordless system such as
DECT or SS wireless.
Keep the distances listed below between equipment in order to prevent noise,
interference or the disconnection of a conversation. (The distance may vary
depending on the environment.)
Equipment
Distance
CS and office equipment such as a computer, telex, More than 2 m

fax machine, etc., or microwaves
CS and PS
More than 1 m
Each PS
More than 0.5 m
Hybrid IP-PBX and CS
More than 2 m
Too many CSs in a small area can cause problems due to conflicts over which signal
channels each CS can use. Ideally, CSs should be a minimum of 25 m to 40 m apart.
However, the required distance between CSs may vary depending on the
environment of the installation site and conditions in which the wireless system is
used. Conduct the site survey to determine the appropriate distance.
Installation Manual
139
2.8.2
Procedure Overview
When connecting the wireless system, use extreme care to conduct a site survey. Site surveys
can be conducted using the KX-TCA255 or KX-TD7590 PS. Inadvertent site survey can result
in poor service area, frequent noise, and disconnection of calls.
1. Investigate the installation site

Refer to "2.8.3 Site Planning".
a. Obtain the map of the CS installation site.

b. Consider the service area demanded by the user on the map.
c. Plan the locations of each CS, taking account of distance, building materials and etc.
2. Prepare for site survey

Refer to "2.8.4 Before Site Survey".
a. Check and assign the CS ID number to the PS.

b. Assign a channel number to each CS by setting the DIP switches on the back of the
CS.
c. Supply electricity to each CS using an AC adaptor or a battery box.

d. Install each CS temporarily as planned.
Notes
Install at least 2 m above the floor.

Keep the antennas in the upright position.
3. Conduct the site survey

Refer to "2.8.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TD7590".
a. Test the radio signal strength using the PS.

Confirm that the radio signal strength level is "12" near the CS.
Using the KX-TCA255
To survey
specific channel
1
Press 1, 9, and POWER

for more than 2 seconds.
Channel No.
Display example:
RADIO STRENGTH
<<< MEASURING >>>
0 to 9
RADIO STRENGTH
CH0 SLOT:06 SYNC
L:12 0000/0100
CS-ID:9005301234
Using the KX-TD7590

To survey
specific channel
1

Channel No.
Display example:
RADIO STRENGTH
<<< MEASURING >>>
0 to 9
CH0 SLOT:06 SYNC

L:12 0000/0100
CS-ID:9005301234
b. By walking away from the CS with the PS, check the radio signal strength. The radio
signal strength weakens as you walk away from the CS.
c. Map the CS coverage area at radio signal strength levels "3" and "8".
d. Make sure that adjacent CS coverage areas overlap where the radio signal strength
level is "8" by at least 5 m.
140
Installation Manual
e. Make sure that the radio signal strength level is greater than "3" at any location within
the service area demanded by the user.
4. Finish the site survey

Refer to "2.8.6 After Site Survey".
a. Return all DIP switches of each CS to the OFF position, and stop supplying power.
b. Turn off the PS.
5. Connect the CS and PS to the Hybrid IP-PBX and test the operation
Refer to "2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX".
a. Connect the CSs to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

b. Register the PSs to the Hybrid IP-PBX.
c. Walk around the service area while having a conversation using a registered PS. If
noise is frequent or conversations disconnect, relocate the CSs or install an additional
CS.
6. Mount the CS on the wall

Refer to "2.8.8 Wall Mounting".
a. Assuming everything goes as planned, mount the CS on the wall.
Installation Manual
141
2.8.3
Site Planning
Choosing the best site for the CS requires careful planning and testing of essential areas. The
best location may not always be convenient for installation. Read the following information
before installing the unit.
Understanding Radio Waves

Characteristics of Radio Waves
The transmission of radio waves and the CS coverage area depend on the structure and
materials of the building.
Office equipment, such as computers and fax machines, can interfere with radio waves. Such
equipment may create noise or interfere with the performance of the PS.
The illustration below shows the special transmitting patterns of radio waves.
1. Radio waves are reflected by objects such as those made of metal.

2. Radio waves are diffracted by objects such as metallic columns.
3. Radio waves penetrate objects like those made of glass.
CS
1. Reflection
Column
2. Diffraction
3. Penetration
Relationships Between Radio Waves and Building Structure and Materials
142
The CS coverage area is affected more by the building materials and their thickness than
the number of obstacles.
Radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted by conductive objects and rarely penetrate
them.
Radio waves tend to penetrate insulated objects and are rarely reflected by them.
Radio waves penetrate thin objects more than thick objects.
The table below shows the transmission tendency of radio waves when they reach objects
made from various materials.
Installation Manual
Object
Material
Transmission Tendency
Wall
Concrete
The thicker they are, the less radio waves

penetrate them.
Ferroconcrete
Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron

there is, the more radio waves are reflected.
Glass
Radio waves usually penetrate them.
Window
Glass with wire nets Radio waves can penetrate them, but tend to be
reflected.
Glass covered with
heat-resistant film
Radio waves are weakened considerably when

they penetrate windows.
Floor
Ferroconcrete

Partition
Steel
Radio waves are reflected and rarely penetrate

them.
Plywood, Glass
Ferroconcrete

there is, the more radio waves tend to be reflected
or diffracted.
Metal
Radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted.
Steel
Radio waves are usually reflected or diffracted,

and rarely penetrate them.
Wood
Radio waves can penetrate them, but they are

weakened.
Column
Cabinet
Installation Manual
143
CS Coverage Area
The example below shows the size of the coverage area of 1 CS if it is installed where there is
no obstacle.
Note
Radio signal strength levels are measured during the site survey (refer to "2.8.5 Site
Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TD7590").
Coverage Area
Radio signal strength level is
greater than "3".
(About 50 m to 60 m)
B
B
Gray Zone:
Conversation will be
intermittent
Good Coverage Area

Radio signal strength
level is greater than "8".
Good conversation
will be kept.
Out of Service:
Cannot make/receive calls
Radio Signal Strength Levels

Level: 00
Level: 01 to 02
Level: 03 to 07
Level: 08 to 10
Level: 11 to 12
Out of range
Receives noise easily or disconnects
May receive noise
Good
Better
Site Survey Preparation

1. Obtain the map and investigate the installation site.
a. Check the obstacles (e.g., shelves, columns, and partitions).
b. Check the materials of the structures (e.g., metal, concrete, and plywood).
c. Check the layout and dimensions of the room, corridor, etc.
d. Write down the above information to the map.
2. Examine the service area demanded by the user on the map, referring to the following
example.
a. Draw the coverage area around a CS. Extend the coverage area to 30 m to 60 m in
one direction, depending on the materials of the building structures and obstacles in
the installation site. Note that a CS cannot be installed outside a building.
144
Installation Manual
b. If 1 CS cannot cover the entire service area, install additional CSs as required.
Overlap the coverage areas of adjacent CSs.
Where CS coverage areas overlap, the PS will start call handover to the next CS if the
signal from one CS becomes weak. However, if a PS moves away from a CS and
there are no CSs available for handover, the PS may go out of range and the call could
be lost.
Example: Installing in a Room Separated by Walls

Things to take note of:
The room is separated by walls.
The room is surrounded by concrete walls.

CS installation plan:
The coverage area of each CS will not extend as much it does where there is no
obstacle, because the radio signals will be weakened by separating walls. Therefore,
you will need 5 CSs to cover the entire room.
150 m
70 m
CS no. 1
CS no. 2
CS no. 5
CS no. 3
CS no. 4
Installation Manual
145
2.8.4
Before Site Survey

Use the KX-TCA255 or KX-TD7590 PS to conduct the site survey.
Note
The display language for the site survey is only in English.
Checking the CS ID Number

Check the CS ID number label attached to the CS. If the CS ID number label is not attached
to the CS, check the CS ID number using the KX-TDA Maintenance Console (refer to "3.3.4
Hybrid IP-PBX Maintenance").
Assigning the CS ID Number to the PS

Using the KX-TCA255
To enter letters
ABC

A:
C:
ABC
E:
GHI
B:
D:
DEF
F:
JKL
CS No.
CS ID No.
0 to 7
0 to 9 and A to F
To the Desired CS No.
To the initial display
Note
To clear the CS ID number assigned to the PS, follow the procedure below:
To clear one by one
CS No.
0 to 7
1
DEF
3

OR
To clear all at once

146
Installation Manual
Using the KX-TD7590

To enter letters
ABC

A:
F1
C:
F3
E:
B:
F2
D:
INT'
F:
CS No.
CS ID No.
0 to 7
0 to 9 and A to F
OK
Note
To clear one by one
CS No.
0 to 7
1
DEF
3

OR

Installation Manual
147
Setting and Installing the CS Temporarily for Site Survey

1. Switch the Radio Signal Test switch from OFF to ON.
2. Set the channel number switches as desired.
DIP Switch
OFF
ON
1
2
Channel Number Switch
3
4
5
6
Radio Signal
Test Switch
Channel 0
Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9
Notes
148
Installation Manual
To see the radio signal strength of more than 1 CS, a channel number must be set for
each CS.
If more than 1 CS is in Radio Signal Test mode, each CS must have a unique channel
number.
3. After setting the DIP switch, connect an AC adaptor or battery box to the CS using a power
supply adaptor.
Note for users in the United Kingdom
240 V AC must not be used on a building site. Instead of an AC adaptor, connect a
battery box to the CS.
Telephone Cord
Modular
Power Supply Adaptor

(PSZZ1TDA0142)
To AC Adaptor (KX-A11/KX-TCA1)/
Battery Box (PSZZTD142CE)
4. Install the CS temporarily for the site survey. Install the CS at least 2 m above the floor,
keeping the antennas in the upright position.
Installation Manual
149
2.8.5
Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TD7590

The PS has a Radio Signal Test mode that monitors the state of the radio link to the CS for site
survey. In the Radio Signal Test mode, the frame loss and signal strength of a synchronous
slot, and the signal strength of the other slots can be measured when the PS is monitoring the
CS. After installing the CSs temporarily as planned during site planning, set the PS to the
Radio Signal Test mode and locate each CS to measure its coverage area. Then, record the
results on the map of the installation site.
Testing the Radio Signal Strength

After locating the CS(s) temporarily, execute the Radio Signal Test using the PS. The PS scans
whether there is a CS that can link with on channel 0 right after entering the Radio Signal Test
mode. The channel to be scanned can be changed by pressing the appropriate keys 0 through
9.
1. Enter the Radio Signal Test mode.

Using the KX-TCA255
To survey other slots
1

To survey specific channel
Channel No.
Previous or Next
0 to 9
Display example:
To store the scan data

RADIO STRENGTH
<<< MEASURING >>>
RADIO STRENGTH
CH0*1 SLOT:06*2 SYNC*3
L:12*4 0000/0100*5
CS-ID:9005301234
Log No.
0 to 9
Using the KX-TD7590

1

Channel No.
Previous or Next
0 to 9
Display example:
RADIO STRENGTH
<<< MEASURING >>>

L:12*4 0000/0100*5
CS-ID:9005301234
Log No.
0 to 9
Notes
*1: Channel number
*2: Slot number
*3: When a slot is synchronised, "SYNC" is displayed.
*4: Radio signal strength level
*5: Frame error (0000 to 9999)/Frame counter (0000 to 9999). Frame error indicates the
number of errors out of 10 000 radio signal receptions. An increased number of frame
errors indicates greater radio signal interference and more frequent noise during
conversation. The ideal number of frame error is "0000".
150
Installation Manual
CAUTION
Storing the scan data will clear all directory data.
2. Measure the radio signal strength by moving to and away from the CS.
a. Move to the CS until the point the radio signal strength level becomes "12".
b. Move away from the CS and identify the CS coverage area within which the radio
signal strength level is greater than "8". Draw the area on the map.
c. Move away from the CS and identify the CS coverage area within which the radio
PS
Channel no. 0
CH0
L:12
PS
CH0
L:08
PS
CH0
L:03

Level: 00
Level: 01 to 02
Level: 03 to 07
Level: 08 to 10
Level: 11 to 12
Out of range
May receive noise
Good
Better
Installation Manual
151
3. Repeat the steps 1 and 2 for other CSs, and relocate the CSs when necessary.
a. Overlap adjacent CS coverage areas where the radio signal strength level is "8" by 5
m to 10 m.
Channel no. 0
5 m to 10 m
Channel no. 1
b. Overlap the CS coverage areas of at least 2 CSs at any location in the installation site.
Channel no. 0
Channel no. 1
Channel no. 2
Channel no. 3
c. Make sure that the radio signal strength level is greater than "3" at any location in the
service area demanded by the user.
Notes
152
Installation Manual
If a channel is set, the results of measurement for the 24 slots on the channel are
saved each time. If the same channel is set, the new results override the previous
ones. Therefore, a measurement of 10 channels 24 slots in total can be made.
If correct results cannot be obtained (e.g., there are many error counters), change the
location of the CS and repeat the site survey to select the best location.
Referring to the Stored Scan Data

Using the KX-TCA255
9
Log No.
0 to 9

To go to other slots
To go to specific channel
Channel No.
Previous or Next
0 to 9
A a
Using the KX-TD7590

1
Log No.
0 to 9

Channel No.
Previous or Next
0 to 9
Clearing the Stored Scan Data

When "CLEAR SCAN DATA" is displayed after turning on the PS, you are required to clear the
scan data.
Using the KX-TCA255
1
GHI
GHI

Using the KX-TD7590

1

Installation Manual
153
2.8.6
After Site Survey

After obtaining the proper measurement results, exit the Radio Signal Test mode before
connecting the CS to the Hybrid IP-PBX.
1. Keep pressing POWER button on the PS until the PS is turned OFF.

2. Disconnect the AC adaptor or battery box from the CS and stop supplying electricity.
3. Switch all DIP switches on the CS from ON to OFF.
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
154
Installation Manual
ON
2.8.7
Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX
Using a CSIF Card

Refer to the following example to connect a CS to the Hybrid IP-PBX.
CSIF8 Card
Port 1
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
Maximum Distance
Under 444 m
Under 694 m
Under 1000 m
Under 694 m
CSIF card (RJ45)

CS (RJ11)
Signal Name
D1
POWH
POWL
D2
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Signal Name
D1
POWH
POWL
D2
Accessory and User-supplied Items for the CS

Accessory (included): Screws 2, Washers 2, Ferrite core 1
Note
For details about CSIF card, refer to "2.5.1 CSIF4 and CSIF8 Card".
Installation Manual
155
Using a DHLC/DLC Card

DHLC8 Card
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
Maximum Distance
Under 222 m
Under 347 m
Under 500 m
Under 347 m
CS (RJ11)
Signal Name
D1
D2
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
DHLC/DLC card
(Amphenol)
Signal Name
D1
D2

Accessory (included): Screws 2, Washers 2
Note
For details about DHLC card or DLC card, refer to "2.5.2 DHLC8 Card", "2.5.3 DLC8
Card", or "2.5.4 DLC16 Card" .
156
Installation Manual
Connecting the CS
1. Connect the cable from the CSIF/DHLC/DLC card to the CS.
Modular
To CSIF/DHLC/DLC card
2. Pass the cable through the groove of the CS (in any direction depending on your
preference).
TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
Installation Manual
157
For the KX-TDA0142CE User only:
3. Wrap the cable once around the ferrite core. Then close the case of the ferrite core.
To CSIF card
Note
If you need to open the ferrite core, use a flathead screwdriver to unlatch the case of the
ferrite core.
158
Installation Manual
Registering the PS
The PS must be registered to the Hybrid IP-PBX before it can be used. Programming of both
the PS and Hybrid IP-PBX is required. A PT with multiline display (e.g., KX-T7636 6-line
display) is required for the Hybrid IP-PBX system programming.
Note
For details about system programming using a PT, refer to "2.3.2 PT Programming" and
"3.3 PT Programming" in the Feature Guide.
Entering the Hybrid IP-PBX System Programming Mode Using a PT

Administrator Level
#
PROGRAM/
PAUSE
System Password for Administrator

for PT Programming
Programming No.
= 1234
3 digits
Note
means default value.
PS Registration
One PS can be registered to a maximum of 4 different Hybrid IP-PBXs.
[690]
ENTER
PS No.
Extn. No.
001 to 128
1 to 4 digits
ENTER
To the PS
operation
below
END
Using the KX-TCA155/KX-TCA255
Press POWER
for 2 seconds.
Select
"Setting Handset".
Select
"Registration".
"Please wait".
Select
"Register H/set".
"Enter Base PIN".
Select
"Base 14".
PIN for PS Registration

4 digits
C.Tone
Installation Manual
159
Using the KX-TD7590

System lock can be set after PS registration. When system lock is enabled, the system
lock password will be required for system setting.
F
Press POWER
for 5 seconds.
To register for the first time
SELECT
/
Select
"INITIAL SETTING".
OR
To re-register
If required
SELECT
/
Select
"PS-PROGRAM".
Select
"REGISTRATION".
/OK
System Lock Password
Select "DECTSYS SETTING".

SELECT
SELECT
4 digits
SELECT
/
Select
"DECT-SYS1-4"
PIN for
PS Registration
/OK
C.Tone
4 digits
To set system lock

SELECT
/
Choose
"ENABLE/DISABLE".
4 digits
DISABLE
/OK
ENABLE
/OK
4 digits
Using the KX-TD7580
/
Press POWER
for 2 seconds.
/
Select
"Register H/set".
160
Installation Manual
Select
"Setting Handset".
/
Select
"Base 14".
/
Select
"Registration".
PIN for
PS Registration
4 digits
C.Tone
Setting the Personal Identification Number (PIN) for PS Registration

To prevent registering the PS to a wrong Hybrid IP-PBX, a PIN for PS registration can be set
to the Hybrid IP-PBX. Before registering the PS to the Hybrid IP-PBX, register the PIN set to
the Hybrid IP-PBX into the PS. By doing so, the PS will only be registered to the Hybrid IP-PBX
with the matching PIN.
Notes
By default, the PIN for PS registration is "1234" for both the Hybrid IP-PBX and PS.
Therefore, the PS can be registered to the Hybrid IP-PBX without setting the PIN.
The PIN for PS registration will only be used when registering the PS to the Hybrid
IP-PBX. Therefore, even when there is more than 1 Hybrid IP-PBX with the same PIN
near the PS, the PS will not be linked to a different Hybrid IP-PBX during normal
operation after registration.
Setting the PIN for Hybrid IP-PBX
[692]

1 to 4 digits
1234
ENTER
END
ENTER
Changing the Display Language of the PS

Press POWER
for 2 seconds.
Select
"Setting Handset".
Select
"Select Language".
Select
"Display Option".
Select the desired

language.
Using the KX-TD7590

F
Press POWER
for 5 seconds.
SELECT
Select
"DISPLAY SETTING".
SELECT
SELECT
/
Select
"LANGUAGE".
SELECT
/
Select the desired
language.
Using the KX-TD7580
/
Press POWER
for 2 seconds.
Select
"Setting Handset".
Select "Select
Language".
Select the desired

language.
Select
"Display Option".
Installation Manual
161
PS Termination
Confirm the following before cancelling the PS registration:
PS is turned on.
PS is within the range.
[691]
PS No.
001 to 128
ENTER
ENTER
If "Rejected" or "Time out" is displayed

CLEAR
YES
Press "CLEAR".
To the PS
operation
below
END
Press "YES".
If the registration information is still stored in the PS

Press POWER
for 2 seconds.
Select
"Setting Handset".
Select
"Registration".
Select
"Cancel Base".
Handset PIN
C.Tone
4 digits
Select
"Base 14".
Select
"YES".
Using the KX-TD7590

F
SELECT
Press POWER
for 5 seconds.
If required
/
Select the
desired item.
Select "CANCEL
DECT-SYS".
4 digits
SELECT
SELECT
/OK
SELECT
C.Tone
Select "YES".
Using the KX-TD7580
/
Press POWER
for 2 seconds.
Handset PIN
Select
"Cancel Base".
4 digits
Select the
desired item.
Installation Manual
Select
"Registration".
Select "YES".
162
Select
"Setting Handset".
C.Tone
Testing the Operation

Walk around the service area while having a conversation using a registered PS. If noise is
frequent or conversations disconnect, relocate the CSs or install an additional CS.
Installation Manual
163
2.8.8
Wall Mounting
1. Place the reference for wall mounting (on the following page) on the wall to mark the 2
screw positions.
2. Install the 2 screws and washers (included) into the wall.

Notes
Make sure that the screw heads are at the same distance from the wall.
Install the screws perpendicular to the wall.
3. Hook the CS on the screw heads.
164
Installation Manual
Reference for Wall Mounting

Please copy this page and use as a reference for wall mounting.
Install a screw here.
71 mm
Note
When you print out this page, the distance on the paper output may deviate slightly from
the measurement indicated above.
Installation Manual
165
2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
2.9
Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
2.9.1
Overview
CS: Cell Station (KX-TDA0142/KX-TDA0141)

KX-TDA0142 Using a CSIF Card
CSIF4 (KX-TDA0143)
CSIF8 (KX-TDA0144)
KX-TDA0141 Using a DHLC/DLC Card
PS: 2.4 GHz Portable Station (KX-TD7680/KX-TD7690)

The KX-TDA100 and KX-TDA200 can support up to 128 PSs. For more details about the PS,
refer to the PS Operating Instructions.
CAUTION
sunlight.
Systems using 2.4 GHz ISM (Industrial, Scientific and Medical) band may interfere
with the KX-TDA wireless system. Examples of such systems are cordless
telephones, wireless LAN, Home RF, microwave ovens and other ISM devices. These
systems may cause minor noise.
Keeping some distance between the equipment listed below may prevent
interference. (The distance may vary depending on the environment.)
Equipment
Distance

fax machine, etc.
166
Installation Manual
CS and PS
More than 1 m
Each PS
More than 0.5 m
More than 2 m
Equipment
Distance
CS and CS
More than 15 m
Please take into consideration the distance between the CSs when site planning.
Please consult a certified dealer for details.
Installation Manual
167
2.9.2
Procedure Overview
When connecting the wireless system, use extreme care to conduct a site survey. Inadvertent
site survey can result in poor service area, frequent noise, and disconnection of calls.


2. Prepare the CS for site survey

a. Assign a CS number to each CS by setting the DIP switches on the back of the CS.
b. Supply electricity to each CS using an AC adaptor or a battery box.
c. Install each CS temporarily as planned.
Notes


Refer to "2.9.5 Site Survey".

Using the KX-TD7680
Display example:

CS No.
CS NO.1 LEVEL:12
<< SEARCHING >>
SAVE:0123456789
1 to 9
Using the KX-TD7690

Display example:

CS No.
CS NO.1 LEVEL:12
<< SEARCHING >>
1 to 9
SAVE:0123456789
168
Installation Manual

b. Turn off the PS.

CS.

Installation Manual
169
2.9.3
Site Planning


CS
1. Reflection
Column
2. Diffraction
3. Penetration
170
them.
Installation Manual
Object
Material
Wall
Concrete

penetrate them.
Ferroconcrete

Glass
Window
reflected.
Glass covered with
heat-resistant film

Floor
Ferroconcrete

Partition
Steel

them.
Plywood, Glass
Ferroconcrete

or diffracted.
Metal
Steel

Wood

weakened.
Column
Cabinet
Installation Manual
171
CS Coverage Area
no obstacle.
Note
Survey").
Coverage Area
greater than "3".
B
B
Gray Zone:
intermittent
Good Coverage Area

Good conversation
will be kept.
Out of Service:

Level: 00
Level: 01 to 02
Level: 03 to 07
Level: 08 to 10
Level: 11 to 12
Out of range
May receive noise
Good
Better

d. Write down the above information on the map.
example.
172
Installation Manual
b. If one CS cannot cover the entire service area, install additional CSs as required.
be lost.
If the signal from the CS fades, due to the structure of the building, there may be some
handover delay. The user will hear a range warning before handover in this case. This
also applies in the case of interference from 2.4 GHz apparatus.


150 m
70 m
CS no. 1
CS no. 2
CS no. 5
CS no. 3
CS no. 4
Installation Manual
173
2.9.4
Before Site Survey

2. Set the CS number switches as desired.
DIP Switch
OFF
ON
1
2
CS Number Switch
3
4
5
6
CS no. 1
CS no. 3
CS no. 4
CS no. 5
CS no. 6
CS no. 7
CS no. 8
CS no. 9
Notes
174
CS no. 2
Radio Signal
Test Switch
Installation Manual
To see the radio signal strength of more than 1 CS, a CS number must be set for each
CS.
If more than 1 CS is in Radio Signal Test mode, each CS must have a unique CS
number.
supply adaptor.
Telephone Cord
Modular

(PSZZ1TDA0142)
Installation Manual
175
2.9.5
Site Survey
The PS has a Radio Signal Test mode that monitors the state of the radio link to the CS. After
installing the CSs temporarily, set the PS to the Radio Signal Test mode and measure each CS
coverage area. Then, record the results on the map of the installation site.

Note

Using the KX-TD7680
Display example:
CS No.
CS NO.1 LEVEL:12*1
<< SEARCHING >>
1 to 9

SAVE:0123456789*2
Scan Data No.

0 to 9
Using the KX-TD7690

Display example:

CS No.
1 to 9
CS NO.1 LEVEL:12*1
<< SEARCHING >>
SAVE:0123456789*2
Scan Data No.

0 to 9
Notes
*1: CS number and radio signal strength level.
*2: Scan data (test result) number. Empty memory space will be indicated by a number;
stored memory space will be indicated by a "-".
176
Installation Manual
PS
CS NO.1 LEVEL:12
CS no. 1
PS
CS NO.1 LEVEL:8
PS
CS NO.1 LEVEL:3

Level: 00
Level: 01 to 02
Level: 03 to 07
Level: 08 to 10
Level: 11 to 12
Out of range
May receive noise
Good
Better
m to 10 m.
CS no. 1
5 m to 10 m
CS no. 2
Installation Manual
177
CS no. 1
CS no. 2
CS no. 3
CS no. 4

Using the KX-TD7680
Scan Data No.

0 to 9

Display example:
When there is scan data
NO.1
CS No.2 LEVEL: 9
When there is no scan data
NO.0
NOT SAVED
To the Desired Scan Data No.
Using the KX-TD7690

Scan Data No.

0 to 9

NO.0
NOT SAVED
178
Installation Manual
Display example:
NO.1
CS No.2 LEVEL: 9
Deleting the Stored Scan Data

Using the KX-TD7680
1
Scan Data No.

0 to 9, or # for all data

Using the KX-TD7690

1

Scan Data No.

Installation Manual
179
2.9.6
After Site Survey


OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
180
Installation Manual
ON
2.9.7
Using a CSIF Card

CSIF8 Card
Port 1
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
Maximum Distance
Under 444 m
Under 694 m
Under 1000 m
Under 694 m
CSIF card (RJ45)

CS (RJ11)
Signal Name
D1
POWH
POWL
D2
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Signal Name
D1
POWH
POWL
D2

Note
For details about CSIF card, refer to "2.5.1 CSIF4 and CSIF8 Card".
Installation Manual
181

DHLC8 Card
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
Maximum Distance
Under 222 m
Under 347 m
Under 500 m
Under 347 m
CS (RJ11)
Signal Name
D1
D2
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
DHLC/DLC card
(Amphenol)
Signal Name
D1
D2

Note
For details about DHLC card or DLC card, refer to "2.5.2 DHLC8 Card", "2.5.3 DLC8
Card", or "2.5.4 DLC16 Card".
182
Installation Manual
Connecting the CS
1. Connect the cable from the CSIF/DHLC/DLC card to the CS.
Modular
preference).
TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
Installation Manual
183
Registering the PS
Note
Entering the System Programming Mode

PT (Administrator Level)
#
PROGRAM/
PAUSE

for PT Programming
Programming No.
= 1234
3 digits
PS (Using the KX-TD7680)

FUNC
Press POWER
for 2 seconds.
Select
"PS PROGRAM".
Select
"SYSTEM SET".
If required
System Setting Menu
4 digits

MENU
Press POWER
for 2 seconds.
S1
SEL
Select
"PS PROGRAM".
If required
SEL
Select
"SYSTEM SETTING".
S1
ENTR

4 digits
System Setting Menu

S1
Note
means default value throughout this section.
184
Installation Manual
S1
PS Registration
[690]
ENTER
PS No.
Extn. No.
001 to 128
1 to 4 digits
ENTER
To the PS
operation
below
END
When the PS has not been registered yet

When registering the PS for the first time, it is possible to select the desired language for
the display. (You do not need to enter the PS system programming mode when registering
for the first time.)
Using the KX-TD7680
[ F2 ]
[ F3 ]
Press S2 repeatedly
to select the desired
language.
Press S3
for 2
seconds.
C.Tone
Press
POWER for
2 seconds.
Using the KX-TD7690

F2
F3
Press S2 repeatedly
language.
Press S3
for 2
seconds.
C.Tone
Press
POWER for
2 seconds.
When the PS has already been registered to another Hybrid IP-PBX

Using the KX-TD7680
C.Tone
Choose
"SYSTEM 14".
Select
"REGISTRATION".
Using the KX-TD7690

SEL
Select
"REGISTRATION".
S1
SEL
Choose
"SYSTEM 14".
C.Tone
S1
Installation Manual
185
Setting the System Lock

When a system lock has been set, the system lock password will be required for PS system
setting.
Using the KX-TD7680
Choose
"Enable/Disable".
Select
"SYSTEM LOCK".
4 digits
4 digits
ENABLE
DISABLE
C.Tone
Using the KX-TD7690
Select
"SYSTEM LOCK".
SEL
SEL
CHNG
S1
S1
Choose
"Enable/Disable".
ENTR
ENABLE
S1
DISABLE
ENTR
C.Tone
S1
186
Installation Manual
4 digits
S1
4 digits

Notes
[692]

ENTER
1 to 4 digits
1234
ENTER
END
Setting the PIN for PS

Using the KX-TD7680

Select
"CHANGE PIN"
C.Tone
1 to 4 digits
1234
Using the KX-TD7690

SEL
Select
"CHANGE PIN"
S1

1 to 4 digits
1234
ENTR
C.Tone
S1
Installation Manual
187
PS Termination
PS is turned on.
[691]
PS No.
001 to 128
ENTER
ENTER

CLEAR
Press "CLEAR".
YES
To the PS
operation
below
END
Press "YES".

Using the KX-TD7680
Select "YES".
Select the
desired item.
Select "DELETE
SYSTEM".
C.Tone
Using the KX-TD7690

SEL
Select "DELETE
SYSTEM".
S1
SEL
Select the
desired item.
S1
Select "YES".
SEL
C.Tone
S1

188
Installation Manual
2.9.8
Wall Mounting
screw positions.

Notes
Installation Manual
189

71 mm
Note
190
Installation Manual
2.10 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
2.10 Connection of Doorphones and Door

Openers KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
2.10.1 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers
The KX-TDA100 supports a maximum of 8 doorphones (KX-T30865 with a DPH4 card, or
German type with a DPH2 card) and a maximum of 8 door openers.
The KX-TDA200 supports a maximum of 16 doorphones (KX-T30865 with a DPH4 card, or
German type with a DPH2 card) and a maximum of 16 door openers.
Notes
KX-T30865 is a Panasonic doorphone.

German type doorphones and door openers are user-supplied.
Maximum Cabling Distance
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
Maximum Distance
Under 70 m
Under 113 m
Under 180 m
Under 113 m
Doorphone
Door Opener
Current Limit for door opener: 24 V DC/30 V AC, 1 A maximum
Installing the Doorphone (KX-T30865)

1. Loosen the screw to separate the doorphone into 2 halves.
Pan
ason
ic
Screw
Installation Manual
191
2. Pass the wires through the hole in the base cover, and attach the base cover to a wall
using 2 screws.
Screw
To 8-pin terminal block
Note
Two kinds of screws are included with a KX-T30865. Please choose the appropriate kind
for your wall type.
: when a doorphone plate has been fixed to the wall
: when you wish to install the doorphone directly onto the wall
3. Connect the wires to the screws located in the front cover.
To 8-pin terminal block
4. Re-attach the 2 halves and re-insert the screw.
Connection
Use 8-pin and 10-pin terminal blocks (included with the card) for connection.
1. While pressing down on the hole at the top of the terminal block using a screwdriver, insert
the wire into the side hole as shown below. Repeat this procedure for other doorphones
and door openers.
Refer to "2.6.2 DPH4 Card" and "2.6.3 DPH2 Card" for pin assignments.
Doorphone
Door Opener
192
Installation Manual
2. Attach the terminal blocks to the connectors of the DPH4/DPH2 card on the Hybrid IPPBX.
To doorphones/
door openers
Installation Manual
193
2.11 Connection of Peripherals KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
2.11 Connection of Peripherals KX-TDA100/

KX-TDA200
2.11.1 Connection of Peripherals
Maximum Distance
Under 5 m
PC Server PC
BGM/
Music on Hold
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
Maximum Distance
Under 10 m
Under 10 m
Under 10 m
Under 10 m
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
Maximum Distance
Under 10 m
Under 10 m
Under 10 m
Under 10 m
USB
Pager:
Amplifier/Speaker
Maximum Distance
Under 2 m
PC
RS-232C
Printer
BGM/MOH
The Hybrid IP-PBX provides Background Music and Music on Hold. Up to 2 external music
sources (e.g., user-supplied radios) can be connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX.
CAUTION
Wiring should be done carefully to prevent undue force being exerted on the plug.
Otherwise, music may intermittent.
External Music Jacks are SELV ports and should only be connected to approved
SELV devices, or in Australia, via the Line Isolation Unit with the Telecommunications
Compliance Label.
Note
When the Hybrid IP-PBX and external music sources are not connected to the same
earth, hum noise may be induced into Background Music and Music on Hold.
194
Installation Manual
Pager
Up to 2 paging devices (user-supplied) can be connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX.
CAUTION
External Paging Jacks are SELV ports and should only be connected to approved SELV
devices, or in Australia, via the Line Isolation Unit with the Telecommunications
Compliance Label.
PC/Printer (via RS-232C)

The Hybrid IP-PBX is equipped with an RS-232C interface. This interface provides
communication between the Hybrid IP-PBX and the user-supplied devices such as PC or line
printers. The RS-232C port is used for system programming, SMDR, diagnostics and external
system database storage (save/load) functions.
Note
Use an RS-232C cross cable for connection between the Hybrid IP-PBX and PC.
Pin Assignments
Circuit Type
No.
6
Signal Name
Function
EIA
CCITT
RD (RXD)
Receive Data
BB
104
3
4
SD (TXD)
ER (DTR)
Transmit Data
Data Terminal Ready
BA
CD
103
108.2
5
6
SG
DR (DSR)
Signal Ground
Data Set Ready
AB
CC
102
107
7
8
RS (RTS)
CS (CTS)
Request To Send
Clear To Send
CA
CB
105
106
Connection Charts
For connecting a printer/PC with a 9-pin RS-232C connector
Hybrid IP-PBX
Printer/PC
Circuit Type
(EIA)
Signal
Name
Pin No.
Pin No.
Signal
Name
Circuit Type
(EIA)
BB
RD (RXD)
RD (RXD)
BB
BA
SD (TXD)
SD (TXD)
BA
CD
ER (DTR)
ER (DTR)
CD
AB
SG
SG
AB
CC
DR (DSR)
DR (DSR)
CC
CA
RS (RTS)
RS (RTS)
CA
CB
CS (CTS)
CS (CTS)
CB
Installation Manual
195
Hybrid IP-PBX
Printer/PC
Circuit Type
(EIA)
Signal
Name
Pin No.
Pin No.
Signal
Name
Circuit Type
(EIA)
BB
RD (RXD)
FG
AA
BA
SD (TXD)
RD (RXD)
BB
CD
ER (DTR)
SD (TXD)
BA
AB
SG
20
ER (DTR)
CD
CC
DR (DSR)
SG
AB
CA
RS (RTS)
CS (CTS)
CB
CB
CS (CTS)
DR (DSR)
CC
RS (RTS)
CF
RS-232C Signals
Receive Data (RXD):(input)

Conveys signals from the printer or the PC.
Transmit Data (TXD):(output)

Conveys signals from the unit to the printer or the PC. A "Mark" condition is held
unless data or BREAK signals are being transmitted.
Data Terminal Ready (DTR):(output)

This signal line is turned ON by the unit to indicate that it is ON LINE. Circuit ER (DTR)
ON does not indicate that communication has been established with the printer or the
PC. It is switched OFF when the unit is OFF LINE.
Signal Ground (SG)

Connects to the DC ground of the unit for all interface signals.
Data Set Ready (DSR):(input)

An ON condition of circuit DR (DSR) indicates the printer or the PC is ready. Circuit
DR (DSR) ON does not indicate that communication has been established with the
printer or the PC.
Request To Send (RTS):(output)

This lead is held ON whenever DR (DSR) is ON.
Clear To Send (CTS):(input)

An ON condition of circuit CS (CTS) indicates that the printer or the PC is ready to
receive data from the unit. The unit does not attempt to transfer data or receive data
when circuit CS (CTS) is OFF.
Frame Ground (FG)

Connects to the unit frame and the earth ground conductor of the AC power cord.
196
Installation Manual
PC/Server PC (via USB version 1.1)

The Hybrid IP-PBX is equipped with a USB interface. This interface provides communication
between the Hybrid IP-PBX and a PC or a Server PC.
The PC is used for system programming, diagnostics and external system database storage
(save/load) functions.
The Server PC is used for connecting PCs on a LAN to provide third party call control CTI. The
CTI connection uses the CSTA Phase 3 or TAPI 2.1 protocol.
Note
The operating system of the PC or Server PC required for third party call control depends
on your CTI application software. For details, refer to the manual for your CTI application
software.
Pin Assignments
No.
Signal Name
VBUS
USB D-
USB D+
GND
Installation Manual
197
2.12 Power Failure Connections KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
2.12 Power Failure Connections KX-TDA100/

KX-TDA200
2.12.1 Power Failure Connections
When the power supply to the Hybrid IP-PBX fails, power failure transfer (PFT) will switch from
the current connection to the Power Failure Connection. Refer to "2.4.1 Power Failure Transfer"
in the Feature Guide for further information.
Power Failure Connection is required to implement this feature.
Note
While DC power is provided by the backup batteries, the Hybrid IP-PBX will remain fully
operational and the connection will not switch to the Power Failure Connection.
Using Analogue Trunk Card and Extension Card

Power Failure Connection connects a specific SLT and a trunk in the event of power failure. The
following analogue trunk and extension cards can be used for Power Failure Connections:
Analogue trunk cards: LCOT16 (4 PFT ports), LCOT8 (2 PFT port), and LCOT4 (2
PFT port)
Extension cards: MSLC16 (4 PFT ports), SLC16 (4 PFT ports), DHLC8 (2 PFT port)
and SLC8 (2 PFT port)
To 1 analogue trunk card, connect only 1 extension card.
Note
By programming the Hybrid IP-PBX, a trunk conversation established during power failure
can be maintained even when the power returns and the connection is switched back to
the normal configuration from the Power Failure Connection. However, if no special
programming is performed, the connection will be dropped when power returns.
RJ11
R2
R1
T1
T2
T2
T1
R1
R2
Extension Card
(e.g., SLC8)
Trunk Card
(e.g., LCOT8)
To trunk
198
Installation Manual
To SLT

User-supplied (not included): RJ11 connectors
RJ11 Connector Pin Assignments for Analogue Trunk Card

PFT Ports 1 and 2
1
4
No. Signal Name
Function
R2
Ring port 2
R1
Ring port 1
T1
Tip port 1
T2
Tip port 2
PFT Ports 3 and 4 (for LCOT16 card only)
1
4
No. Signal Name
Function
R4
Ring port 4
R3
Ring port 3
T3
Tip port 3
T4
Tip port 4
RJ11 Connector Pin Assignments for Extension Card

PFT Ports 1 and 2
1
4
No. Signal Name
Function
T2
Tip port 2
T1
Tip port 1
R1
Ring port 1
R2
Ring port 2
PFT Ports 3 and 4 (for MSLC16/SLC16 card only)
1
4
No. Signal Name
Function
T4
Tip port 4
T3
Tip port 3
R3
Ring port 3
R4
Ring port 4
Installation Manual
199
Using BRI Card

LINE 1 and LINE 2 of the BRI4 and BRI8 cards can be used for Power Failure Connections.
Note
When the power returns, the connection will switch back to normal configuration from the
Power Failure Connection, and a trunk conversation established during power failure will
be dropped.
RJ45
(LINE 2)
Set all DIP switches
at "ON" positions.
To ISDN extension
To NT1
RJ45
(LINE 1)
OFF
OFF
ON
ON

Switch Settings
Switch
Type
PFT Setting
DIP
Set all DIP switches to "ON" positions to use LINE 1 and

LINE 2 as a PFT port.
LINE 1: Power Failure LINE (NT1)
LINE 2: Power Failure EXTN (extension)
RJ45 Connector LINE 1 Pin Assignments
200
Installation Manual
No. Signal Name
Level [V]
Function
1-2 Reserved
TX1
(+)
Transmit data 1
RX2
(+)
Receive data 2
RX1
(-)
Receive data 1
TX2
(-)
Transmit data 2
7-8 Reserved
No. Signal Name
Level [V]
Function
1-2 Reserved
RX2
(+)
Receive data 2
TX1
(+)
Transmit data 1
TX2
(-)
Transmit data 2
RX1
(-)
Receive data 1
7-8 Reserved
Installation Manual
201
2.13 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
2.13 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA100/

KX-TDA200
2.13.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX
CAUTION
SD Memory Card must be inserted in the SD Memory Card slot of the MPR card
before start up.
Before touching the System Initialise Switch and the Reset Button, discharge static
by touching ground or wearing an earthing strap.
Once you have started the Hybrid IP-PBX and if you unplug the Hybrid IP-PBX, do
not perform the following procedures to start the Hybrid IP-PBX again. Otherwise,
your programmed data is cleared. To restart the Hybrid IP-PBX, refer to "4.1.4 Using
the Reset Button".
The Hybrid IP-PBX will continue to be powered even if the power switch is turned
"OFF".
The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device, ensure that the socketoutlet is located/installed near the equipment and is easily accessible.
1. Set the System Initialise Switch to the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position.

RUN Indicator
Reset Button
RESET
SYSTEM
INITIALIZE
NORMAL
System Initialise Switch
202
Installation Manual
2. Plug the AC power cord into the Hybrid IP-PBX and an AC outlet, and turn on the Hybrid
IP-PBX.
Note
For safety reasons, do not stretch, bend, or pinch the AC power cord.
To AC Outlet
3. Press the Reset Button with a pointed tool. (The RUN indicator will flash.)
4. While the RUN indicator is flashing (within about 10 s), return the System Initialise Switch
to the "NORMAL" position. Depending on the configuration, initialisation takes about 1 min
to 3 min. If successfully executed, the RUN indicator will stop flashing and be kept lit.
All data will be cleared, and the Hybrid IP-PBX as well as all optional service cards (except for
the IP-GW card) will be initialised to the default values. The DPTs should show the time as
01:00.
The data of the IP-GW card will not be initialised.
Notes
Use only the AC power cord included with the Hybrid IP-PBX for the PSU.
Use only the supplied AC power cord for the purpose of applying the EMC standard,
if the Hybrid IP-PBX is connected (Germany only).
LED Indications
Indication
Colour
Description
RUN
Green
PBX status indication
OFF: Power Off (includes normal reset)
ON: Power On and running (on-line)
Flashing (60 times per minute): Starting up
Flashing (120 times per minute): Starting up or resetting with:
the System Initialise Switch in "SYSTEM INITIALIZE"

position
the SD Memory Card not inserted
ALARM
Red
Alarm indication
OFF: Normal
ON: Alarm (CPU stop, alarm for each card)
Flashing: Alarm (MPR file error in restarting)
Installation Manual
203
Confirming the Trunk Connection

After initialisation, programme the Hybrid IP-PBX and establish trunk connection, and then use
a PT to confirm it.
To confirm, dial [ ] [3] [7] + trunk number (3 digits) or press S-CO button. You will hear a dial
tone if the trunk is available and connected.
204
Installation Manual
Section 3
Guide for the KX-TDA Maintenance Console
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
Explains the installation procedure, structure, and basic

information of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console.
Installation Manual
205
3.1 Overview KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
3.1
Overview KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
3.1.1
Overview
KX-TDA Maintenance Console is designed to serve as an overall system programming
reference for the Hybrid IP-PBX. To programme and administer the Hybrid IP-PBX by PC, you
need to install the KX-TDA Maintenance Console onto the PC.
This manual describes overview and installation of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console only.
KX-TDA Maintenance Console*1
Menu Bar
Programme Menu
*1
The contents and design of the software are subject to change without notice.
206
Installation Manual
3.2 Connection KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
3.2
Connection KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
3.2.1
Connection
Serial Interface Connection

USB Port
To USB Port
PC
To COM Port
PC
RS-232C Port
Note
For pin assignments and maximum cabling distance, refer to "2.11.1 Connection of
Peripherals".
LAN Connection via CTI-LINK Card
RJ45
Switching Hub
To network port
PC
Note
For pin assignments and maximum cabling distance, refer to "2.6.6 CTI-LINK Card".
Installation Manual
207
3.2 Connection KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
External Modem Connection
Modem
To RS-232C port (25-pin)
To trunk/Hybrid IP-PBX extension

port assigned as the trunk destination
External Modem
RS-232C Port
(9-pin)
Hybrid IP-PBX
Signal Name
Pin No.
Pin No.
Signal Name
SD (TXD)
RD (RXD)
RD (RXD)
SD (TXD)
DR (DSR)
ER (DTR)
ER (DTR)
20
DR (DSR)
After connecting the Hybrid IP-PBX and the external modem, set the power switch of the
external modem to "ON", then the external modem will be initialised with the default values.
The following AT command settings may be required for the modem:
The Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal should be ignored.
The Data Terminal Equipment (DTE)/Modem flow control should be turned off.
The data compression should be disabled.
Error Correction is not necessary.

Notes
208
Installation Manual
Use an RS-232C straight cable for connection between the Hybrid IP-PBX and
external modem.
An AT command (for initialisation, enabling automatic answer, etc.) can only be
programmed by KX-TDA Maintenance Console. "AT&F0E0V1X1S10=30S12=50" is
stored as the default value.
For more information about the AT command, refer to the external modem's
instructions.
3.3 Installation of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
3.3
Installation of the KX-TDA Maintenance

Console KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
3.3.1
Installing and Starting the KX-TDA Maintenance

Console
System Requirements
Operating System
Microsoft Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP

Hardware
CPU: Intel Pentium 133 MHz or better microprocessor

RAM: at least 64 megabytes (MB) of free RAM (128 MB recommended)
HDD: at least 100 MB of hard disc space
Password Security
A password is required to perform programming for security purposes. Do not disclose the
password. This will avoid unauthorised access and possible dial through fraud.
Warning to the Administrator regarding the system password
1. Please inform the customer of the importance of the password and the possible
dangers.
2. Please maintain the secrecy of the password. This will avoid unauthorised access and
possible dial through fraud.
3. Please change the password periodically.

4. We strongly recommend that a password of 10 digits is used for maximum protection
against hackers.
5. If the system password is forgotten, you can examine the backup of the system
programming. Therefore, please keep your backup secure to avoid unauthorised

access.
If you have a backup of the system data, you can find the password by loading the
backup system data onto the PC and check the password using the programming
tool. For how to back up system data, refer to "3.3.4 Hybrid IP-PBX Maintenance".
If you do not have a backup system data, you have to set the PBX to the factory default
and reprogramme it. Therefore, we recommend that you back up the system data.
Installation Manual
209
Installing the KX-TDA Maintenance Console and Selecting

Appropriate Country/Area Data
1. a.
Save the setup file of the KX-TDA

Maintenance Console on your PC.
b. Double-click the icon to execute the

setup file.
c. Follow the instructions of the wizard.
2. a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Notes
Type the appropriate Country Code.

The KX-TDA Maintenance Console will
be installed with the appropriate default
data for your country/area.
Click [Next].
Follow the instructions of the wizard.
Click [Finish].
Click [OK].
To install or uninstall the software into Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP

Professional, the user must be grouped either of "Administrators" or "Power Users".
To connect the PC to the Hybrid IP-PBX via USB, the KX-TDA USB driver must have
been installed. Follow the instructions of the wizard to install the KX-TDA USB driver.
Starting the KX-TDA Maintenance Console and Assigning the Basic

Items (Quick Setup)
When you start the KX-TDA Maintenance Console with the Installer Level Programmer Code
and connect to the Hybrid IP-PBX for the first time after initialisation (with the factory default
setting), Quick Setup will launch automatically. During Quick Setup, you will setup the following
basic items:
Date and Time of the Hybrid IP-PBX. The date and time set on the PC will be used.
System Password for installer for PC programming.
Operator extension numbers. Operator extensions for all time modes (day/lunch/
break/night) can be assigned.
210
Installation Manual
Flexible Numbering type to pattern 1 or pattern 2. If pattern 1 (with ) is selected, " "
must prefix all feature numbers (except access numbers) when an extension user
wants to use a feature.
Operator call and Idle Line Access/ARS numbers (0 or 9). The feature numbers for
operator call and Idle Line Access/ARS can be selected.
Remote Maintenance Dial Number. Enter the complete telephone number of the PBX
(including the country code). When necessary, this number will be used to access the
PBX from a remote location for maintenance purposes.
1. Connect the PC to the Hybrid IP-PBX with a

USB cable.
2. Start the KX-TDA Maintenance Console
from the start menu.
3. Type the Installer Level Programmer Code
(default: 1234), then click [OK].
The Programmer Code authorises different
programming levels, and the Quick Setup is
only available when you start the KX-TDA
Maintenance Console with the Installer Level
Programmer Code.
Note
There are 2 other Programmer Codes
with limited authorisation: Administrator
Level (default: 1111), and User Level
(default: none).
4. Click "Connect"
"USB" from the menu bar.
5. Type the system password for installer

(default: 1234), then click [OK] to log-in.
6. When country/area data do not match:
a. Click [OK] to replace the country/area

data of the Hybrid IP-PBX. Replacement
may take several minutes to complete.
b. Follow the procedure described in

"2.13.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX" and
restart the Hybrid IP-PBX.
c. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to restart the KXTDA Maintenance Console.
Installation Manual
211
7. Follow the instructions of the wizard and

assign the basic items (Quick Setup).
The programme menu appears.
Notice
1. During a long programming session, it is highly recommended that you periodically

save the system data to the SD Memory Card. You can think of system data as stored
in RAM, whereas SD Memory Card as stored on a hard disk. If the PBX undergoes a
sudden power failure or system reset for some reason, all the system data in RAM will
be lost.
To save the system data to the SD Memory Card, (1) click the "SD Memory Backup"
icon before resetting the PBX or turning off the power, or (2) exit the KX-TDA
Maintenance Console so that the PBX starts automatically saving the system data.
2. When the PBX is initialised, not all data is taken from the SD Memory Card. The data
for present status of extension FWD/DND buttons is taken from battery backup
memory in the PBX.
3. The PC will not perform any shutdown operation, or enter the power-saving system
standby mode while the KX-TDA Maintenance Console is connected to the Hybrid IPPBX. To perform either of the operations above, first close the connection to the
Hybrid IP-PBX.
CAUTION
Do not remove the SD Memory Card during access to it. Doing so will damage the system
data, and in the worst case, damage the SD Memory Card.
212
Installation Manual
3.3.2
Structure of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console
Menu Bar
File
Connect
Tool
Utility
Diagnosis
File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)
File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC
SD Card File View and Load
SD Card File Delete
Message File Transfer PC to PBX
Message File Transfer PBX to PC
Error Log
T1/E1 Signaling Bit Monitor
T1/E1 Line Trace
ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace
Digital Trunk Error Report
CS Information
PS Information
Timed Update
System Reset
Reset by the Command
Window
Help
Installation Manual
213
3.3.3
Hybrid IP-PBX Configuration

This section briefly describes how to check the configuration of the Hybrid IP-PBX using the
KX-TDA Maintenance Console when PC and the Hybrid IP-PBX are connected by USB cable.
For detailed descriptions of each feature and related PT programming, refer to the on-line help
at each screen.
(refer to "Starting the KX-TDA Maintenance
Console and Assigning the Basic Items
(Quick Setup)" in "3.3.1 Installing and
Starting the KX-TDA Maintenance Console").
2. To check the slot condition of the Hybrid IPPBX:
a. Double-click "Configuration".
b. Double-click "Slot".
3. To check the PS status:
b. Double-click "Portable Station".
4. To check other configurations, double-click

the other items in the same manner.
214
Installation Manual
3.3.4
Hybrid IP-PBX Maintenance

This section briefly describes how to perform maintenance of the Hybrid IP-PBX using the KXTDA Maintenance Console when PC and the Hybrid IP-PBX are connected by USB cable.
at each screen.
(refer to "Starting the KX-TDA Maintenance
Console and Assigning the Basic Items
(Quick Setup)" in "3.3.1 Installing and
Starting the KX-TDA Maintenance Console").
2. To diagnose a card:
Click "Utility"
"Diagnosis" from the menu
bar.
3. a.
Click "Status" of the desired card and

change its status to "OUS".
b. Click "Card Type" of the desired card.

The diagnosis screen appears.
To use other utility commands, click the

desired item in the step 2 above.
Installation Manual
215
216
The programme files in the PC are transferred to

SD Memory Card of the Hybrid IP-PBX.
Programme files in the SD Memory Card is
overwritten in this process.
The programme files in the SD Memory Card are

transferred to the PC.
The name, date, time, and size of programme

files in the SD Memory Card are viewed, then
these files are transferred to each optional
service card in the Hybrid IP-PBX or to CS
connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX.
SD Card File Delete

deleted.
The message files for Outgoing Messages in the

PC are transferred to all MSG cards mounted on
the OPB3 card of the Hybrid IP-PBX. Available
only when at least 1 MSG card is installed.

MSG cards mounted on the OPB3 card are
transferred to the PC. Available only when at
least 1 MSG card is installed.
Error Log
The error log is displayed (for details, refer to

"4.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log").
T1/E1 Signaling Bit Monitor
Monitors the sent and received signalling bits on

T1/E1 line.
T1/E1 Line Trace
Traces the sent and received signalling bits and

dialling numbers on specified channel of T1/E1
line.
ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace
Displays ISDN protocol trace data of the BRI/PRI

card.
Digital Trunk Error Report
Displays the errors on digital trunks that are

collected in the past for selected time units (10
min, 30 min, 1 h, or 24 h).
CS Information
Displays the internal information of the CS.
PS Information
Displays the registration information of the PS.
Timed Update
Updates the programmes in the LPR cards

(optional service cards with local processors)
when newer programmes are found in the SD
Memory Card by comparing them at a preset
time. (During the update, the cards become out
of service.)
Installation Manual
System Reset
Resets the connected Hybrid IP-PBX. (It is the

same as pushing the Reset Button with the
System Initialise Switch in the "NORMAL"
position.) After using this command, you have to
restart the KX-TDA Maintenance Console and
connect to the Hybrid IP-PBX again.
Installation Manual
217
218
Installation Manual
Section 4
Troubleshooting KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
This section provides information on the Hybrid IP-PBX

and telephone troubleshooting.
Installation Manual
219
4.1 Troubleshooting KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
4.1
4.1.1
Installation
PROBLEM
Extension does not operate.
PROBABLE CAUSE
Bad extension card.
SOLUTION
Exchange the card for a known working one.
Bad connection between the Take the telephone and plug it into the same
Hybrid IP-PBX and
extension port using a short telephone cord.
telephone.
If the telephone works, then the connection
between the Hybrid IP-PBX and the
telephone must be repaired.
A telephone with an A-A1
relay is connected.
Use a 2-wire cord.

Set the A-A1 relay switch of the telephone to
the "OUT" or "OFF" position.
Bad telephone.
Take the telephone and plug it into another

extension port that is working. If the
telephone does not work, replace the
telephone.
Wrong type of PSU.
Replace the PSU with the appropriate type.
Improper operation.
Press the Reset Button (refer to "4.1.4 Using

the Reset Button").
Noise on external paging.
Induced noise on the wire

between the Hybrid IP-PBX
and the amplifier.
Use a shielded cable as the connection wire

between the Hybrid IP-PBX and amplifier. A
short shielded cable is recommended.
Distorted external music.
Excessive input level from

external music source.
Decrease the output level of the external

music source by using the volume control on
the music source.
Alternate CallingRing/Voice
and Live Call Screening
(LCS) do not function as set
when using a Wireless Phone
(KX-T7880/KX-T7885/KXTD7894/KX-TD7895).
Voice-calling mode and

Hands-free mode with LCS
are not available with
Wireless Phones.
Switch the calling mode to ring-calling.

Set the LCS mode to "Private".
The ALARM indicator on the

front of the cabinet turns on
red.
A major system error occurs See the error log using the KX-TDA
in the Hybrid IP-PBX.
Maintenance Console (refer to "4.1.5
Troubleshooting by Error Log").
220
Installation Manual
4.1.2
Connection
Connection between the Hybrid IP-PBX and a PT:
Can you dial

an extension?
CAUSE
No
SOLUTION
The T/R is connected to the D1/D2.

D1
T
R
D2
D1
T
R
D2
Hybrid IP-PBX
Use the correct cord (the

inner 2 wires are for T/R and
the outer 2 wires are for
D1/D2).
Extension
Connection between the Hybrid IP-PBX and an SLT:
CAUSE
SOLUTION

D1
T
R
D2
T
R
Hybrid IP-PBX
Yes
Extension

inner 2 wires are for T/R).
If a telephone equipped
with an A-A1 relay is
connected to the Hybrid
IP-PBX, set the A-A1
relay switch of the
telephone to "OFF".
Connection between the Hybrid IP-PBX and an SLT that is polarity-sensitive:
CAUSE
SOLUTION
The "T" is connected to the "R".

D1
T
R
D2
Hybrid IP-PBX
Reverse the connections of

the T/R.
T
R
Extension
(Continued on the next page.)
Installation Manual
221
Connection between the trunk and the Hybrid IP-PBX:

(Continued from the
previous page.)
Can you dial

out on a
trunk?
CAUSE
Trunk is connected to the T2/T1.
T2
R1
T1
R2
No
Trunk
Hybrid IP-PBX
Trunk is connected to the T2/R1.

T2
R1
T1
R2
Trunk
222
Installation Manual
Hybrid IP-PBX
SOLUTION
Reconnect the trunk to
the T1/R1 or T2/R2 of the
telephone jack using
2-conductor wiring.
4.1.3
Operation
PROBLEM
PROBABLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
When using the

speakerphone on an
APT, nothing is audible.
The HANDSET/
HEADSET selector is
set to the "HEADSET"
position.
When the headset is not used, set the

HANDSET/HEADSET selector to the
"HANDSET" position.
When using the

speakerphone/monitor
mode with a DPT,
nothing is audible.
The "HEADSET" mode

is selected by Personal
Programming,
"Handset/Headset
Selection".
When the headset is not used, select

the "HANDSET" mode by Personal
Programming.
The PT does not ring.
The ringer volume is off.
Turn on the ringer volume.
During a power failure,

extensions connected to
ports 1 to 4 of MSLC16/
SLC16 and ports 1 to 2 of
DHLC8/SLC8 cards do
not operate.
A DPT or APT is
connected to the
extension port.
The dialling mode (tone

or pulse) is incorrect.
Disconnect the DPT or APT and

connect an SLT.
Set the Tone/Pulse switch to the other
position.
Originating an outside
call, call transfer, or
conference cannot be
performed.
The corresponding CO
button does not exist on
the PT.
Programme the CO button. Refer to

"1.19.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature
Guide.
Cannot register the PS.
Wrong Personal
Identification Number
(PIN) is registered to the
PS.
Register the PIN set to the Hybrid IPPBX into the PS.
CS is not connected
properly.
Make sure that the cable is connected

properly with correct pin assignments.
Also, make sure that the cable does not
make short circuits.
Switch all DIP switches off.
Installation Manual
223
PROBLEM
PROBABLE CAUSE
PS becomes out of
range.
Cannot make calls using
the PS.
SOLUTION
CSIF card is not

working.
Install the CSIF card properly.
CS is not working.

224
Location of CS is not
good.
Locate the CS properly (refer to "2.8.5

Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KXTD7590" or "2.9.5 Site Survey" ).
Access system of the

PS is not properly set.
Change the access system setting of

the PS to the appropriate system or
automatic.
Noise is frequent while

using the PS.
Conversations
disconnect while using
the PS.
Call handover is not
working.
PS is out of CS coverage
area.
PS stays out of service

when the CS status is
changed from Out of
Service to In Service.
Installation Manual
It may take about 20 s

for CS to start up after
the status has been
changed to In Service.

Wait until the CS starts up.
4.1.4
Using the Reset Button

If the Hybrid IP-PBX does not operate properly, use the Reset Button. Before using the Reset
Button, try the system feature again to confirm whether there definitely is a problem or not.
Notes
1. When the System Initialise Switch is set to "NORMAL", pressing the Reset Button
causes the following:
Camp-on is cleared.
Calls on hold are terminated.
Calls on exclusive hold are terminated.
Calls in progress are terminated.
Call park is cleared.

Other data stored in memory, except the above, are not cleared.
2. When the System Initialise Switch is set to the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position, you
must press the Reset Button with caution, because all data stored in memory will be
cleared by the following operation: (1) pressing the Reset Button and then, (2) setting
the System Initialise Switch to the "NORMAL" position while the RUN indicator is
flashing (within approximately 10 s).
Operation
1. If the Hybrid IP-PBX does not operate properly:
a. Make sure that the System Initialise Switch is set to the "NORMAL" position.
b. Press the Reset Button.
RUN Indicator
Reset Button
RESET
SYSTEM
INITIALIZE
NORMAL
2. If the Hybrid IP-PBX still does not operate properly:

a. Set the System Initialise Switch to the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position.
c. Return the System Initialise Switch to the "NORMAL" position while the RUN indicator
is flashing (within approximately 10 s).
Note
As a result of Step 2, all the programmed data will be cleared.
Installation Manual
225
3. If the Hybrid IP-PBX still does not work:

a. Unplug the Hybrid IP-PBX.
b. Set the System Initialise Switch to the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position.
c. Plug in the Hybrid IP-PBX after 5 min.
d. Press the Reset Button.
e. Set the System Initialise Switch to the "NORMAL" position while the RUN indicator is
226
Installation Manual
4.1.5
Troubleshooting by Error Log

When a major system error occurs in the Hybrid IP-PBX, the ALARM indicator on the front of
the cabinet turns on red, and the system logs the error information.
Error Log Display Format

Below is the display format of the error log. To see the error log using the KX-TDA Maintenance
Console, refer to "3.3.4 Hybrid IP-PBX Maintenance".
Example: KX-TDA Maintenance Console
Example: Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
04/01/01 10:37AM MJ ALM #000 10000 MPR WDT overflow

04/01/01 11:07AM MN ALM #010 10000 AC power down
04/01/01 03:55PM MN ALM #301 10501 Digital trunk RAI reception
1
Description
Item
Description
Date
Date of the error detection
Time
Time of the error detection
Level
Major Alarm (MJ ALM):

Errors that affect the whole system operation, or result in
system failure
Minor Alarm (MN ALM):
Errors that affect certain part of system operation
Error Code
Three-digit error code
Installation Manual
227
Item
5
Sub Code
Description
Five-digit sub code (1XXYY)
1: Cabinet number
XX: Slot number
KX-TDA100: 00 to 06 (00: MPR slot; 01 to 05: Free slot; 06:
Option slot)
KX-TDA200: 00 to 11 (00: MPR slot; 01 to 10: Free slot; 11:
Option slot)
YY: Physical port number (01 to 16)
For OPB3 card, sub slot number + port number will be
displayed.
Sub slot 1: 11 to 14
Note
When there is no parameter for slot and physical port
number, XX and YY will be displayed as "00".
Example: Sub code for MPR card = 10000
228
Error Message
Installation Manual
Error description (maximum 36 characters)
List of Errors and Solutions

The tables below list the errors and their solutions.
When an error whose error code is indicated with "*" occurs in the Hybrid IP-PBX, the ALARM
indicator on the front of the cabinet turns on red, and the system logs the error information.
When the error conditions indicated by the error codes "021", "091", "092", and "510" are
recovered, the ALARM indicator will turn off automatically, indicating successful
troubleshooting. When other errors are logged, the ALARM indicator will turn off only when the
log for major or minor errors is cleared from the KX-TDA Maintenance Console.
In other words, the ALARM indicator will turn off under the following conditions:
When the errors "021", "091", "092", and "510" are logged: when the error
conditions are recovered
When other errors are logged: when the log for major or minor errors is cleared from
the KX-TDA Maintenance Console
LPR (Optional Service Card with Local Processor) Initial Self Diagnosis
Error Code
211
Error Message
Speech path
loop-back check
error
PROBABLE CAUSE
Optional service card

malfunction: DHLC,
DLC, SLC, CSIF,
LCOT, T1, E1, BRI,
PRI, OPB3, E&M, IPGW, DID
SOLUTION
212
Echo canceller
access error

malfunction: CSIF,
ECHO
214
DSP Boot check

error

malfunction: T1, E1
215
Framer IC access
error

malfunction: T1, E1,
BRI, PRI
216
MSG card DSP

error

malfunction: MSG,
OPB3
217
MSG card data

error

malfunction: MSG,
OPB3
Erroneous recording of
messages
See if the corresponding optional

service card is installed properly
Pull out and re-insert the
corresponding optional service card
Press the Reset Button
Replace the corresponding optional
service card

Re-record the messages
service card
Installation Manual
229
System Start-up and On-line Operation

Error Code
Error Message
000*
MPR WDT
overflow
001
SDRAM bit error
PROBABLE CAUSE
002
System Restart
010*
AC power down
011*
DC power down
SOLUTION
MPR card malfunction

malfunction: CTI-LINK
Erroneous processing
of MPR card software
Software error due to
external factors

Reprogramme the Hybrid IP-PBX
Replace the MPR card (be sure to turn
off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)
Reset Button is
pressed
Power failure
of MPR card software
external factors
Ignore if not frequent

Power supply system

malfunction (e.g.,
power failure, power
noise, trouble with
UPS)
Bad connection or
breaking of AC cord
Power supply circuit
(PSU, back board)
malfunction
Check the power supply system

See if the AC cord is connected
properly
Check the AC cord
Replace the AC cord (be sure to turn
Replace the PSU (be sure to turn off
the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)
Replace the back board (be sure to
turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when
replacing)
AC power down
(PSU, back board)
malfunction
Detection of over
current (short circuit on
optional service cards)
012*
230
MPR RAM
battery low
Installation Manual
Battery out

properly
Check the AC cord
replacing)
Remove the optional service cards and
restart the Hybrid IP-PBX
Error Code
Error Message
PROBABLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
014*
FAN Alarm
PSU-L malfunction
See if anything is jammed in the fan

016
CS overload
Defective cable
CS malfunction
malfunction: CSIF
Check the cable diameter and length

Replace the CS
service card
017
BRI port overload
Defective cable
Defective ISDN
terminal equipment
malfunction: BRI
Check the cable

Replace the defective terminal
equipment
Check the number of connected
terminal equipment
service card
020*
SD file access
error
021*
SD Memory Card
disconnected
022
Not enough free

space on SD card

Replace the SD Memory Card
Not enough memory

space available to save
the system data, or to
upload system files
from the KX-TDA
Maintenance Console
Delete the files whose file names start

with "$" from SD Memory Card
Delete the "Pxxx" files (old programme
files of optional service cards) from SD
Memory Card. "xxx" indicates the card
type (e.g., "PDHLC" for DHLC card)
SD Memory Card
malfunction
Bad connection of SD
Memory Card
SD Memory Card not
installed
Memory Card
SD Memory Card
malfunction
Note
Do not delete the "PMPR" file; it is the
programme file of the MPR card.
Installation Manual
231
Error Code
Error Message
PROBABLE CAUSE
023
System data file

version error
024
System
initialization file
version error
025
Card initialization
file version error
026
LCD file version

error
027
System data file

checksum error
028
System
initialization file
checksum error
029
Card initialization
file checksum
error
030
LCD file
checksum error
031*
System data file

not found
032*
System
initialization file
not found
SOLUTION
Old system files on SD

Memory Card
Defective system files

on SD Memory Card
Restore the backup files

Re-install the software
SD Memory Card not

installed
Memory Card
SD Memory Card
malfunction

033*
Card initialization
file not found
034*
LCD file not found
035
System data file

access error
036*
System
initialization file
access error
037*
Card initialization
file access error
038*
LCD file access

error
090
Over Card
Limitation
Too many optional
service cards installed
Reduce the number of optional service

cards
091*
PT connection
over
Too many PTs

connected
Reduce the number of PTs
092*
CS connection
over
Too many CSs

connected
Reduce the number of CSs
232
Installation Manual
Error Code
Error Message
PROBABLE CAUSE
200
LPR start up error

(ROM NG)
201*
LPR start up error

(RAM NG)
202*
LPR start up error

(No Program)
203*
LPR start up error

(Version NG)
204*
LPR start up error

(Download NG)
205*
LPR start up error

(No response)
206
LPR start up error

(Card type NG)
207
LPR start up error

(Check SUM NG)
230*
Card
disconnected
SOLUTION

malfunction: DHLC,
DLC, CSIF, T1, E1,
BRI, PRI, OPB3, CTILINK, E&M, IP-GW,
DID, SLC8

malfunction: DHLC,
DLC, CSIF, T1, E1,
DID, SLC8

not installed properly
malfunction
Back board
malfunction
231
LPR alive check

error
232
MPR-LPR
communication
error
233
LPR data check

error
234
DPLL clock failure

malfunction: DHLC,
DLC, CSIF, T1, E1,
DID, SLC8
Back board
malfunction
235*
CS clock failure

malfunction: CSIF

service card
Update the software of the
service card

service card
replacing)
service card
replacing)
service card
Installation Manual
233
Error Code
Error Message
PROBABLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
250*
T1/E1 DSP failure

malfunction: T1, E1
251
MSG DSP failure

malfunction: MSG
300*
Digital trunk out of

synchronization
Digital trunk RAI
Network (digital trunk)

malfunction
malfunction: PRI, T1,
E1
Wrong A/B switch
setting: PRI, T1, E1
Wrong termination
switch setting: PRI30,
E1
301*
reception
302*
Digital trunk AIS

reception
303*
Multiframe out of
synchronization
304*
Frame error
Data Link failure
306
E1 Channel Block
failure
308
IP-GW LAN Loop

back Error
234
Installation Manual
connector; 75
when using BNC
connector
service card
Check the connection between the CS
and CSIF card or DHLC/DLC card
Check the connection between the
network and PRI/BRI card
network and IP-GW card
Check the signals from the network

Check the cable
See if the A/B switch is set to A on the
See if the termination switch is set
properly on the corresponding optional
Network (digital trunk)

malfunction
malfunction: E1
Wrong A/B switch
setting: E1
Wrong termination
switch setting: E1
service card: 120
LAN No Carrier
when using RJ45
Data link between the

CS and CSIF card or
DHLC/DLC card failed
network and PRI/BRI
card failed
network and IP-GW
card failed
307
Check the signals from the network

Check the cable
See if the A/B switch is set to A on the
See if the termination switch is set
properly on the corresponding optional
service card: 120
305*

service card
when using RJ45
connector; 75
when using BNC
connector
service card
IP-GW card not

connected to the LAN

LAN and IP-GW card
Detection of IP-GW
LAN Loop back Test
error

service card
Collect the log data of IP-GW (refer to
the documentation for the IP-GW card)
Error Code
Error Message
PROBABLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
309
IP-GW Core Data

Link Error
Detection of IP-GW
Core data Link error

310*
Port Link Failure
Voice Processing
System malfunction
Ports defective on
optional service card:
DHLC, DLC
Check the Voice Processing System

service card
IP-GW H.323
Dummy Call Test

Error
Detection of IP-GW
H.323 Dummy Call
Test error
IP-GW
Gatekeeper Error
Detection of
Gatekeeper access
error
320
321

service card
Check the IP address setting of

Gatekeeper
Check whether the Gatekeeper is
connected to the network and work
properly
Check the route to the Gatekeeper
322
IP-GW
Gatekeeper
Registration Error
Gatekeeper
Registration is failed
Check the Gatekeeper setting
323
IP-GW SDRAM
Failure
Detection of IP-GW
SDRAM error

service card
324
IP-GW DPRAM
Failure
Detection of IP-GW
DPRAM error

service card
325
IP-GW LAN Chip

Failure
Detection of IP-GW
LAN Chip failure

service card
326
IP-GW Stop
370
371
IP-GW is stopped from

a remote maintenance
PC
This information is logged when IP-GW

is stopped from a remote maintenance
PC
IP-GW Rebooted
by Maintenance
Console
IP-GW is rebooted
from a remote
maintenance PC

is rebooted from a remote
maintenance PC
IP-GW Rebooted

malfunction: IP-GW
Check whether the software version of

the IP-GW card is correct
service card
390
Digital signal
synchronization
established
Synchronisation of
digital line established
or restored
This information is logged when

synchronisation of digital line is
established, and does not indicate an
error condition that needs to be solved
Installation Manual
235
Error Code
Error Message
PROBABLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
391
Data Link
established
Connection with PC
Phone/PC Console or
Voice Processing
System (DPT
Integration)
established or restored

connection with PC Phone/PC
Console or Voice Processing System
(DPT Integration) is established, and
does not indicate an error condition
that needs to be solved.
However, if this is logged frequently
(with "305 Data Link failure"), check the
connection as it may not be done
properly.
392
Clock master card

selected
Clock master card has

been changed to the
one indicated by the
sub code
Check if the proper card is selected as

the new clock master card
393
LAN Carrier
detected
IP-GW card connected

to the LAN

synchronisation of LAN is established
394
IP-GW Core Data

Link established
IP-GW Core Data Link

established

Core Data Link is recovered
395
IP-GW
Gatekeeper Error
Cleared
Connection to the
Gatekeeper is
recovered

connection to the Gatekeeper is
recovered
396
IP-GW Run
IP-GW is started from a

remote maintenance
PC
510*
SMDR disconnect
236
Installation Manual
RS-232C cable not

connected
Breaking of RS-232C
cable
Printer (terminal
equipment)
malfunction

is started from a remote maintenance
PC
Check the RS-232C cable
Check the terminal equipment
Section 5
System Outline KX-TDA30
This section provides general information on the Hybrid

IP-PBX, including the system capacity and
specifications.
Installation Manual
237
5.1 System Highlights KX-TDA30
5.1
System Highlights KX-TDA30
5.1.1
System Highlights
Networking Features
This Hybrid IP-PBX supports the following networking features:
Virtual Private Network (VPN)
VPN is a service provided by the telephone company. It uses an existing line as if it were
a private line.
Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network
The PBX can connect to another PBX via a private IP network. In this case, voice signals
are converted into IP packets and sent through this network.

An incoming call distribution group can be used as a small call centre with the following
features:
Queuing Feature
When a preprogrammed number of extensions in an incoming call distribution group are
busy, additional incoming calls can wait in a queue. While calls are waiting in the queue,
the calls are handled by the Queuing Time Table, which can be assigned for each time
mode (day/lunch/break/night).
Log-in/Log-out
Incoming call distribution group members can join (Log-in) or leave (Log-out) the groups
manually. While logged-in, a member extension can have a preprogrammed time period
automatically for refusing calls after completing the last call (Wrap-up).
VIP Call
It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups. If an extension
belongs to multiple groups and the extension becomes idle, queuing calls in the groups
will be distributed to the extension in priority order.

Connecting a personal computer (PC) to this Hybrid IP-PBX (via a DPT, or via a Server PC on
a LAN) enables extension users to make use of advanced features by using the stored data in
the PC or in the Server PC.
Voice Mail Features

This Hybrid IP-PBX supports Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF Integration as well
as DPT (Digital) Integration.
238
Installation Manual
5.1 System Highlights KX-TDA30

By connecting telephones in parallel, you can increase the number of telephones connected
to the PBX without adding additional extension cards.
Parallel Mode
An SLT can be connected to an APT or DPT which is connected to a Super Hybrid Port of
the PBX. The SLT shares the same extension number with the APT or DPT.
An SLT can be connected to a DPT which is connected to a Super Hybrid Port of the PBX.
Unlike parallel mode, XDP mode allows each telephone to act as an independent
extension with its own extension number.
Digital XDP
A DPT can be connected to another DPT which is connected to a DPT port or a Super
Hybrid Port of the PBX. Similar to XDP mode, each DPT acts as an independent extension
with its own extension number.

PSs (e.g., KX-TD7690) can be connected to this Hybrid IP-PBX. It is possible to use the Hybrid
IP-PBX features using the PS like a PT. A PS can also be used in parallel with a wired
telephone (Wireless XDP Parallel Mode). In this case, the wired telephone is the main
telephone and the PS is the sub telephone.

This Hybrid IP-PBX supports PC Phone and PC Console. These Panasonic CTI applications
provide advanced features.
Installation Manual
239
5.2 Basic System Construction KX-TDA30
5.2
Basic System Construction KX-TDA30
5.2.1
Main Unit
The main unit is equipped with 4 Super Hybrid Ports. For system expansion, optional service
cards can be installed, and an additional AC adaptor can also be connected.
Construction of Main Unit
Front Cover
240
Installation Manual
Main Board
Cable Cover
5.2.2
Trunk (Telephone Company Lines)

Analogue/BRI
Remote PC
Private
IP Network
Hybrid IP-PBX
Router
Batteries
PC
Printer
Server PC
SLT
SLT
Fax Machine
Wireless Phone
PC
PC
DPT
APT
DSS Console
DPT
DSS Console
ISDN Telephone
BGM/Music On Hold (MOH)

PS
CS
USB
KX-T7636/
KX-T7633
Pager/ Amplifier
Speaker
PC
Voice Processing
System
KX-T7600 DPT
KX-T7600 DPT
Installation Manual
241
Hybrid IP-PBX
Telephone
Company
Analogue
Trunk
LCOT4
(KX-TDA3180)
DLC8
(KX-TDA3172)
CID4
(KX-TDA3193)
DLC4
(KX-TDA3171)
DPT
KX-T7636/KX-T7633
LCOT2
(KX-TDA3183)
SLC8
(KX-TDA3174)
ISDN BRI Line

(Digital Trunk)
PT-interface CS
PC
DSS
Console
Voice
Processing
System
PS
SLC4
(KX-TDA3173)
BRI2
(KX-TDA3280)
DPH4
(KX-TDA3161)
IP-GW4
(KX-TDA3480)
Private
IP Network
DPH2
(KX-TDA3162)
SLT
Wireless Phone
Fax Machine
Router
MSG2
(KX-TDA3191)
Amplifier
Batteries
MEC
(KX-TDA3105)
RMT
(KX-TDA3196)
Pager/Speaker
Radio
ECHO8
(KX-TDA3166)
Server PC
AC Cord & AC Adaptor*1
Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR)
EXT-CID
(KX-TDA3168)
4 Super Hybrid Ports*2
APT
SLT
PC
DPT
DSS Console
Wireless Phone Fax Machine
Voice
Processing
System
PT-interface CS PS
Main Board
KX-T7600 DPT KX-T7600 DPT
*1
*2
242
In addition to the supplied AC adaptor, an additional AC adaptor can be connected to the Hybrid IPPBX.
The Hybrid IP-PBX has 4 Super Hybrid Ports pre-installed.
Installation Manual
5.3 Options KX-TDA30
5.3
Options KX-TDA30
5.3.1
Options
Model No.
Model Name
Maximum
Quantity
Description
KX-TDA3105
Memory Expansion Card

(MEC)
Memory expansion card for

Broadcasting features and to double the
number of DPTs, using Digital XDP
connection. To be installed in the MEC
slot.
KX-TDA3161
4-Port Doorphone Card

(DPH4)
4-port doorphone card for 4 doorphones

and 4 door openers.
KX-TDA3162
2-Port Doorphone Card

(German Type) (DPH2)
2-port doorphone card for 2 German

type doorphones and 2 door openers.
KX-TDA3166
8-Channel Echo Canceller

Card (ECHO8)
8-channel card for echo cancellation

during conferences.
KX-TDA3168
Extension Caller ID Card

(EXT-CID)
Sends Caller ID signals to extension

ports.
KX-TDA3171
4-Port Digital Extension

Card (DLC4)
4-port digital extension card for DPTs,

DSS consoles, a Voice Processing
System (VPS), and PT-interface CSs.
KX-TDA3172
8-Port Digital Extension

Card (DLC8)
8-port digital extension card for DPTs,

DSS consoles, a VPS, and PT-interface
CSs.
KX-TDA3173
4-Port Single Line

Telephone Extension Card
(SLC4)
4-port extension card for SLTs.
KX-TDA3174
8-Port Single Line

Telephone Extension Card
(SLC8)
KX-TDA3180
4-Port Analogue Trunk Card 4-port analogue trunk card with 2 power
(LCOT4)
failure transfer (PFT) ports.
KX-TDA3183
2-Port Analogue Trunk Card 2-port analogue trunk card with 2 power
(LCOT2)
failure transfer (PFT) ports.
KX-TDA3191
2-Channel Message Card

(MSG2)
2-channel message card.
KX-TDA3193
4-Port Caller ID Card

(CID4)
4-port Caller ID signal type FSK/FSK

(with Call Waiting Caller ID [Visual Caller
ID])/DTMF. To be mounted on the LCOT4
card.
Installation Manual
243
5.3 Options KX-TDA30
Model Name
KX-TDA3196
Remote Card (RMT)
Analogue modem card for remote

communication with the Hybrid IP-PBX.
V90 support. To be installed in the RMT
slot.
KX-TDA3280
2-port ISDN Basic Rate Interface card

with 1 power failure transfer (PFT) port.
EURO-ISDN/ETSI compliant.
KX-TDA3480
4-Channel VoIP Gateway

Card (IP-GW4)

H.323 V.2, ITU-T G.729a, G.723.1 and
G.711 compliant.
KX-A236
Additional AC Adaptor
AC adaptor and AC cord for system

expansion.
244
Installation Manual
Description
Maximum
Quantity
Model No.
5.4 Specifications KX-TDA30
5.4
Specifications KX-TDA30
5.4.1
General Description
Switching
AC Adaptor
Non-blocking
AC Input
100 V AC to 240 V AC, 1.5 A, 50 Hz/60 Hz
DC Output
40 V, 1.38 A (55.2 W)
DC Input
External Battery
+36 V DC (+12 V DC 3, battery capacity of 14 Ah or below

recommended for each external battery)
Maximum Power Failure

Tolerance
300 ms (without using backup batteries)
Memory Backup Duration
7 years
Dialling
Trunk

Extension

Trunk
RJ45/RJ11 (2 wire) each trunk port
Extension
RJ45/RJ11 (4 wire) each extension port
Paging Output
1 conductor jack
Connectors
DC IN 1: 40 V, 1.38 A (55.2 W)
DC IN 2: 40 V, 1.38 A (55.2 W)
1 conductor jack
External MOH
(Music on Hold)
Output
Mode Conversion
DP-DTMF, DTMF-DP
Ring Frequency
20 Hz/25 Hz (selectable)
Trunk Loop Limit
1600
Operating
Environment
Temperature
0 C to 40 C
Humidity
10 % to 90 % (non-condensing)
maximum
Conference Call Trunk
From 10 3-party conference call to 4 8-party conference call
Music on Hold
1 port (Level Control: -11 dB to +11 dB in 1 dB steps)

Selectable Tone/External Music Source port
Paging
Internal
Level Control: -15 dB to +6 dB in 3 dB steps
External
1 port (Volume Control: -15 dB to +15 dB in 1 dB steps)
Serial Interface RS-232C

Port
USB
1 (maximum 115.2 kbps)

1
Installation Manual
245
Extension Connection Cable
SLT
1-pair wire (T, R)
DPT
1-pair wire (D1, D2) or

APT
PT-interface CS
DSS Console and Add-on Key Module 1-pair wire (D1, D2)
Dimension
275 mm (W) 376 mm (H) 117 mm (D)
Weight (when fully mounted)
Under 3.5 kg
246
Installation Manual
5.4.2
Characteristics
Terminal Equipment Loop Limit
Minimum Leakage Resistance
PT: KX-T7600 series: 90
SLT: 600
Doorphone: 20
PT-interface CS: 65
15 000
; all other DPTs/APTs: 40
including set
minimum
Maximum Number of Extension 1 for PT or SLT

Instruments per Line
2 by Parallel or eXtra Device Port connection of a PT and an SLT
3 by Digital eXtra Device Port connection of two DPTs and an SLT
Ring Voltage
75 Vrms at 20 Hz/25 Hz depending on the Ringing Load
Trunk Loop Limit
1600
Hookswitch Flash/Recall
Timing Range
24 ms to 2032 ms
BRI Cards Internal ISDN Mode
Supply Voltage: 40 V
Power Supply: 4.5 W per 1 line, 5 W per 2 lines
Power Supply Method: Phantom Power Supply
Door Opener Current Limit
24 V DC/30 V AC, 1 A maximum
Paging Terminal Impedance
600
MOH Terminal Impedance
10 000
maximum
Installation Manual
247
5.4.3
System Capacity
Maximum Trunk and VoIP Line

The Hybrid IP-PBX supports the following number of trunk lines and VoIP lines.
Line Type
Maximum Number
Trunk Line
12
VoIP Line

The following number of items of terminal equipment can be supported by the Hybrid IP-PBX.
For how to count the total number of items of equipment to be connected, refer to "MEC Card
Calculation".
Terminal Equipment Type
Without Additional AC
Adaptor
Without MEC Card
SLT
KX-T7600 series DPT and KXT7560/KX-T7565 DPT
With Additional AC Adaptor

Without MEC
Card
24
With MEC Card

24
Total 24
Total 24
Total 48
KX-T7600 series DPT
24
24
48
24
24
Total 4
Total 24
Other DPT
24
APT
CS
PS
28
28
4 ports (1 VPS)*1
4 ports (1 VPS)*1
Other DPT and APT
VPS
SLT, PT, CS, and VPS
Total 28
Total 28
Total 52
Doorphone
Door Opener
Add-on Key Module

Total 24
Total 24
Total 48
USB Module
*1
A maximum of 4 ports (8 channels) of a single VPS can be connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX.
Note
Devices connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX that exceed the system capacity will not function.
248
Installation Manual

Calculate the MEC figure from the type and total number of items of equipment to be
connected. If the MEC figure exceeds 28, you need to install an MEC card.

Equipment Type
PT
MEC Figure
APT
Pre-installed 4 Super Hybrid Ports
SLC4
SLC8
Extension Card*1
CS (1 unit)
VPS (1 port)
ISDN Telephone
*1
Only the extension cards that can support SLTs count for the MEC figures.
Calculation Example
Equipment Type
MEC Figure
KX-T7600 series DPT
16 units
16
SLC4
1 card
SLC8
1 card
VPS
4 ports
Total
32
The total MEC figure is 32. As this exceeds 28, you need to install an MEC card for this
configuration.
AC Adaptor Selection (Without BRI Extension Port)

You must connect an additional AC adaptor in any of the following conditions:
A total of more than 4 APTs and DPTs (except KX-T7600 series, KX-T7560/KX-T7565)
are connected.
More than 4 CSs are connected.
An MEC card is required to support the configuration.

Note
For how to connect an AC adaptor or additional AC adaptor, refer to "6.12.1 Starting the
Hybrid IP-PBX".
Installation Manual
249
AC Adaptor Selection (With BRI Extension Port)

If the Hybrid IP-PBX has a BRI extension port, you must connect an additional AC adaptor in
any of the following conditions:
A total of more than 4 APTs and DPTs (except KX-T7600 series, KX-T7560/KX-T7565)
are connected.
More than 4 CSs are connected.
An MEC card is required to support the configuration.
The total load figure exceeds 32.

Note
For how to connect an AC adaptor or additional AC adaptor, refer to "6.12.1 Starting the
Hybrid IP-PBX".
Load Figure Calculation

Equipment Type
PT
Load Figure
APT
Pre-installed 4 Super Hybrid Ports
SLC4
SLC8
Extension Card*1
CS (1 unit)
VPS (1 port)
ISDN Telephone
*1
*2
1*2
Only the extension cards that can support SLTs count for the load figures.
If the connected ISDN telephone has an external power source, its load figure is 0.
AC Adaptor Capability
The following load figures can be supported.
Connected AC Adaptor
Supplied AC Adaptor only
Supplied AC Adaptor and Additional AC Adaptor
*1
250
Maximum Load Figures

32
96*1
If the load figure exceeds 96, it cannot be supported by the KX-TDA30. In this case, use the KX-TDA100 with MType Power Supply Unit (PSU-M), or the KX-TDA200 with either PSU-M or L-Type Power Supply Unit (PSU-L).
Installation Manual
Calculation Example
Equipment Type
Load Figure
Other DPT/DSS console (except KXT7600 series, KX-T7560/KX-T7565)
4 units
16
CS
3 units
12
ISDN Telephone
5 units
Total
33
The total load figure is 33. As this exceeds 32, you need to connect an additional AC adaptor.
Installation Manual
251
252
Installation Manual
Section 6
Installation KX-TDA30
This section describes the procedures to install the

Hybrid IP-PBX. Detailed instructions for planning the
installation site, installing the optional service cards,
and cabling of peripheral equipment are provided.
Further information on system expansion and
Installation Manual
253
6.1 Before Installation KX-TDA30
6.1
Before Installation KX-TDA30
6.1.1
Before Installation
Please read the following notes concerning installation and connection before installing the
Hybrid IP-PBX. Be sure to comply with applicable local regulations (e.g., law, guidelines).

When installing telephone wiring, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce
the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
1. Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.

2. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for
wet locations.
3. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been
disconnected at the network interface.
4. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.

5. Anti-static precautions should be taken during installation.
This set is made for wall mounting. Avoid installing in the following places. (Doing so may result
in malfunction, noise, or discolouration.)
1. In direct sunlight and hot, cold, or humid places.

Temperature range: 0 C to 40 C
2. Sulphuric gases produced in areas where there are thermal springs, etc. may damage the
equipment or contacts.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Places in which shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong.

Dusty places, or places where water or oil may come into contact with the unit.
Near high-frequency generating devices such as sewing machines or electric welders.
On or near computers, telexes, or other office equipment, as well as microwave ovens or
air conditioners. (It is preferable not to install in the same room with the above equipment.)
7. Closer than 1.8 m to radios and televisions (both the Hybrid IP-PBX and PTs).
8. Do not obstruct the area around the Hybrid IP-PBX (for reasons of maintenance and
inspectionbe especially careful to allow at least 20 cm above and 10 cm at the sides of
the Hybrid IP-PBX for cooling).
9. Do not block the openings at top of the Hybrid IP-PBX.

10. Do not stack up the optional service cards. To avoid damage to the optional service cards,
always use the extension bolts.
Wiring Precautions
Be sure to follow these instructions when wiring.
1. Do not wire the telephone cable in parallel with an AC power source, computer, telex, etc.
If the cables are run near those wires, shield the cables with metal tubing or use shielded
cables and ground the shields.
2. If cables are run on the floor, use protectors to prevent the wires from being stepped on.
Avoid wiring under carpets.
254
Installation Manual
6.1 Before Installation KX-TDA30
3. Avoid using the same power supply outlet for computers, telexes, and other office
equipment. Otherwise, the Hybrid IP-PBX operation may be interrupted by the inducted
noise from such equipment.
4. Please use 1-pair telephone wire for extension connection of (telephone) equipment such
as standard telephones, data terminals, answering machines, computers, Voice
Processing Systems, etc., except PTs (e.g., KX-T7600 series).
5. The power switch of the Hybrid IP-PBX must be off during wiring. After the wiring is
completed, turn the power switch on.
6. Mis-wiring may cause the Hybrid IP-PBX to operate improperly.

7. If an extension does not operate properly, disconnect the telephone from the extension line
and then connect again, or turn the power to the Hybrid IP-PBX off and on again.
8. The Hybrid IP-PBX is equipped with a 3-wire earthing type plug. This is a safety feature.
If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your
obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the purpose of the earthing-type plug.
9. Use twisted pair cable for trunk connection.

10. Trunks should be installed with lightning protectors. For details, refer to "6.2.11 Lightning
Protector Installation".
Installation Manual
255
6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30
6.2
Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX KXTDA30
6.2.1
Unpacking
Unpack the box and check the items below:
256
Main Unit
AC Cord
AC Adaptor
Screws for Wall Mounting
Washers for Wall Mounting
Mini Plug (for pager and music source)
SD Memory Card
Main Strap
Optional Card Label Sheet
Installation Manual
6.2.2
Names and Locations
SD Memory
Card Slot Cover
Reset Button
System Initialise
Switch
MOH port
Pager port
Earth Terminal
Battery Connector
DC IN 2
DC IN 1
Super Hybrid
Ports
RS-232C port
USB port
Power Switch
Installation Manual
257
6.2.3
Opening/Closing the Covers
Opening the Covers

1. Pull the slide button to the right and, holding it, slide the cable cover upwards. Then turn
the cable cover slightly to remove it.
Slide Button
Cable Cover
2. Remove the three screws.

Screw
3. Holding the protrusions on both sides of the front cover, swing the cover open.
258
Installation Manual
Removing/Attaching the Front Cover

If you prefer, you can remove the front cover.
Removing the Front Cover
Holding the front cover open at about a 45 angle, remove the front cover by pushing it in
the direction of the arrow as shown below.
Attaching the Front Cover

Fit the front cover to the main unit as shown below, and then close the front cover.
Installation Manual
259
Closing the Covers

1. Close the front cover, then tighten the three screws.
Screw
2. Attach the rear hooks on the cable cover to the main unit, then swing the cable cover
closed so that the front hooks fit in place.
Cable Cover
3. Slide the cable cover down until it locks.
260
Installation Manual
6.2.4
Installation of the SD Memory Card
LED
SD Memory Card
Slot Cover
SD Memory
Card
CAUTION
Use only the SD Memory Card included with the Hybrid IP-PBX.
The SD Memory Card contains software for all the processes of the Hybrid IP-PBX
and all the customer data. The SD Memory Card must be inserted before start up.
Do not remove the SD Memory Card during the operation of the Hybrid IP-PBX.
Removing the SD Memory Card during operation may cause damage to the SD
Memory Card, or result in loss of data.
LED Indications
Indication
Colour
Description
SD ACCESS
Green
SD memory card status
ON: Accessing
Note
If you need to remove the SD Memory Card:
Installation Manual
261
6.2.5

IMPORTANT
Connect the frame of the Hybrid IP-PBX to earth.
1. Loosen the screw.

2. Insert an earthing wire (user-
Screw
supplied)*.
3. Tighten the screw.

4. Connect the earthing wire to
earth.
Earthing
wire
To earth
* For earthing wire, green-and-yellow insulation is required, and the cross-sectional area of
the conductor must be more than 0.75 mm2 or 18 AWG.
262

Proper earthing (connection to earth) is very important to protect the Hybrid IP-PBX from
the bad effects of external noise or to reduce the risk to the user of electrocution in the
case of lightning strike.
The earthing wire of the AC cable has an effect against the external noise and lightning
strikes, but it may not be enough to protect the Hybrid IP-PBX. A permanent connection
between earth and the earth terminal of the Hybrid IP-PBX must be made.
Installation Manual
6.2.6

The backup batteries and Back-up Battery Cable provide a backup power supply to allow full
use of the Hybrid IP-PBX in the event of a power failure. In case of power failure, the backup
batteries automatically maintain the power to the Hybrid IP-PBX without interruption.
1. Turn off the power switch of the Hybrid IP-PBX.

2. Connect the Back-up Battery Cable with 3 identical VRLA (Valve Regulated Lead Acid)
batteries (12 V DC 3).
Battery Connector
Back-up Battery Cable
Fuse
Power Switch
Red
Black
Backup Batteries (12 V DC x 3)
Turn on the power switch of the Hybrid IP-PBX only after the installation of the Hybrid IPPBX is finished and AC power is available.
For each backup battery, battery capacity of 14 Ah or below is recommended (otherwise,
the battery charge may not be maintained).
Make sure that the type and capacity of the 3 backup batteries are identical.
The Back-up Battery Cable should not be exposed to direct sunlight. Keep the Back-up
Battery Cable and the backup batteries away from heating appliances and fire. Place the
backup batteries in ventilated place.
For details about the backup batteries, refer to the manual intended for the batteries.
CAUTION

Make sure that the polarities of the backup batteries and wiring are correct.
Make sure that you do not short the backup batteries or cables.
There is a danger of explosion if backup batteries are incorrectly replaced. Replace
only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the battery manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions.
Installation Manual
263
6.2.7
Slot Position
11*1
10*1
04
07
09
03
06
08
02
05
01*2
*1
*2
Slots 10 and 11 accept only cards which do not have external ports. Therefore, these
slots do not have removable cover plates.
Slot 01 contains the pre-installed Super Hybrid Ports. No optional service card can be
installed.
Slot Restrictions
The following table shows the slot restrictions. "
service card.
" indicates that the slot supports the optional
Card
Type
Slot Number
Max
LCOT4
LCOT2
BRI2
DLC4
1*1
SLC4
IP-GW4
DLC8
2*2
SLC8
DPH4
1*3
DPH2
264
ECHO8
EXT-CID
MSG2
Installation Manual
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
*1
*2
*3
Only one of either DLC4 or SLC4 card can be installed.

A maximum of two DLC8 cards, two SLC8 cards, or one of each card can be installed.
Only one of either DPH4 or DPH2 card can be installed.
CAUTION
To protect the main board from static electricity, do not touch parts on the main board or
on the optional service cards. To discharge static electricity, touch ground or wear an
earthing strap.
Notes
When installing or removing the optional service cards, the power switch of the Hybrid
IP-PBX must be in the off position.
For each card, the maximum number that can be installed in the Hybrid IP-PBX is
listed in "5.3.1 Options".
Any card that exceeds the capacity of the Hybrid IP-PBX will be ignored.
When the Hybrid IP-PBX starts up with an invalid configuration, some cards will be
ignored.
Installing Optional Service Cards

1. Before installing the optional service cards, cut and remove the appropriate dummy cover
plates from the main unit.
Dummy Cover Plate
CAUTION
For safety reasons, smooth the cut edges after removing the dummy cover plates.
Installation Manual
265
2. Position the card in the open slot, making sure that the tabs on the both sides of the card
fit into place. Then, holding the card firmly in place, lower the rear end so that the hole of
the card fits over the extension bolt.
Optional Service Card
1
2
Extension Bolt
CAUTION
When installing the optional service cards, do not put pressure on any parts of the main
board. Doing so may result in damage to the Hybrid IP-PBX.
3. Insert the new extension bolt (included with the card) into the hole on the card, and tighten
it to secure the card.
Extension Bolt
266
Installation Manual
4. Stick an appropriate optional card label (included) to the left side of the corresponding
card.
Optional Card Label
5. Connect a cable to an appropriate port of the card.

For details about pin assignments, refer to the appropriate section in "6.3 Installation of
the Trunk Cards KX-TDA30" and "6.4 Installation of the Extension Cards KXTDA30".
Note
Make sure to connect cables after installing the card in the Hybrid IP-PBX, not before.
Installation Manual
267
6. Repeat the procedure for other cards.

A. When installing a card in Slot 07, make sure to detach the LED holder first. After
installing the card, reattach the LED holder.
To detach the LED holder
LED holder
To attach the LED holder
268
Installation Manual
B. When installing a card in Slot 11, tighten the card using the screw included with the
card, instead of the extension bolt.
Screw
Installation Manual
269

1. Attach the strap included with the card to one of the connected cables.
Strap
2. Bind all the connected cables together using the strap.
3. Repeat the procedure for other cards.
270
Installation Manual
4. Attach the main strap (included with the Hybrid IP-PBX) to any of the 5 rails
depending on your preference.
2
1
Main Strap
Installation Manual
271
5. Bind all the connected cables together using the main strap, and then close the cable
cover. For how to close the cable cover, refer to "6.2.3 Opening/Closing the Covers".
Cable Cover
Main Strap
Notes
272
Installation Manual
For safety reasons, do not stretch, bend, or pinch the cables.

If you prefer, you can cut the other side of the cable cover and run the cables
through that opening. For safety reasons, smooth the cut edges.
Removing the Optional Service Cards

1. Loosen and remove the extension bolt.
2. Holding the protrusions of the card, pull the card in the direction of the arrows.
CAUTION
When removing the optional service cards, do not put pressure on any parts of the main
board. Doing so may result in damage to the Hybrid IP-PBX.
Installation Manual
273
6.2.8
Types of Connectors
Connector Type
Pin Number
Used for
RJ45
1
RJ11
4
10-pin
8-pin
Terminal Block Terminal Block
RS-232C
DPH4 (KX-TDA3161NE)
DPH2 (KX-TDA3162)
DLC4 (KX-TDA3171NE)
DLC8 (KX-TDA3172NE)
SLC4 (KX-TDA3173NE)
SLC8 (KX-TDA3174NE)
LCOT4 (KX-TDA3180NE)
LCOT2 (KX-TDA3183)
BRI2 (KX-TDA3280)
IP-GW4 (KX-TDA3480)
Super Hybrid Ports (Main Board)*1
DPH4 (KX-TDA3161)
DLC4 (KX-TDA3171)
DLC8 (KX-TDA3172)
SLC4 (KX-TDA3173)
SLC8 (KX-TDA3174)
LCOT4 (KX-TDA3180)
Super Hybrid Ports (Main Board)*2
DPH4 (KX-TDA3161)
DPH2 (KX-TDA3162)
Main Board
Main Board
Main Board (Pager port, MOH

port)
10
USB
2
Mini Plug
+
-
*1
274
The KX-TDA30E, the KX-TDA30NE, and the KX-TDA30GR have the Super Hybrid Ports with RJ45 connectors.
Installation Manual
*2
Other models of the KX-TDA30 (other than the KX-TDA30E, the KX-TDA30NE, and the KX-TDA30GR) have the
Super Hybrid Ports with RJ11 connectors.
Installation Manual
275
6.2.9
Wall Mounting (KX-TDA30)
Mounting on Wooden Wall

1. Place the reference for wall mounting (on the last page of this manual) on the wall to mark
the 3 screw positions.
130 mm
250 mm
2. Install the screws and washers (included) in the wall.

Washer
Drive the screw

to this position.
Notes
3. Hook the main unit on the screw heads.
Notes
276
Installation Manual
Mounting on Concrete or Mortar Wall

CAUTION
1. Place the reference for wall mounting (on the last page of this manual) on the wall to mark
the 3 screw positions.
130 mm
250 mm
2. Install three anchor plugs (user-supplied) in the wall.

Hammer
Anchor Plug
6.4 mm
29 mm
3. Install the screws (included) in the wall.
Drive the screw

to this position.
4. Hook the main unit on the screw heads.
Installation Manual
277
Notes
278
Installation Manual
6.2.10 Wall Mounting (AC Adaptor)

Mounting on Wooden Wall
screw positions.
110 mm
2. Install the screws and washers (included) in the wall.

Washer
Drive the screw

to this position.
Notes
3. Hook the AC adaptor on the screw heads.
Note
Be careful not to drop the AC adaptor.
Installation Manual
279
Mounting on Concrete or Mortar Wall

CAUTION
screw positions.
110 mm
2. Install two anchor plugs (user-supplied) in the wall.

Hammer
Anchor Plug
6.4 mm
29 mm
3. Install the screws (included) in the wall.
Drive the screw

to this position.
4. Hook the AC adaptor on the screw heads.
Note
Be careful not to drop the AC adaptor.
280
Installation Manual

110 mm
Note
Installation Manual
281
6.2.11 Lightning Protector Installation

Overview
A lightning protector is a device that must be installed on a trunk to prevent a dangerous surge
from entering the building and damaging equipment.
A dangerous surge can occur if a telephone line comes in contact with a power line. Trouble
due to lightning surges has been showing a steady increase with the development of electronic
equipment.
In many countries/areas, there are regulations requiring the installation of lightning protection.
A lightning strike to a telephone cable which is 10 m above ground can be as high as 200 000 V.
The Hybrid IP-PBX must be installed with lightning protectors. In addition, earthing (connection
to earth) is very important for the protection of the user.
KX-A207
TELESPIKE BLOK MODEL TSB (TRIPPE MFG. CO.)
SPIKE BLOK MODEL SK6-0 (TRIPPE MFG. CO.)
Krone 237A strips fitted with 14A/1 surge arrestors
Super MAX (PANAMAX)
MP1 (ITW LINK)
Installation
Trunk
Trunk
Trunk
Lightning
Protectors
Terminal
Board
Extn.
Hybrid
IP-PBX
Extn. Extn. Extn.

SLT
Earth
282
Installation Manual
PT
CS
Frame
Earth
Extn.: Extension line
Outside Installation
(Main Building)
Lightning Protectors
Trunk
(Another Building)
Trunk
SLT
Terminal
Board
Extn.
SLT
Hybrid
IP-PBX
Extn.
Extn.
Lightning
Protector
PT
CS
Extn.
PT
CS
Earth
Extn.: Extension Line
If you install an extension outside of the building, the following precautions are recommended:
a. Install the extension wire underground.

b. Use a conduit to protect the wire.
Note
The lightning protector for an extension and CS is different from that for trunks.
Installation of an Earth Rod

Lightning Protector
Trunk
Earthing
Wire
Hybrid
IP-PBX
(Underground)
Earth Rod
1. Installation location of the earth rod.....Near the protector
Installation Manual
283
2.
3.
4.
5.
Check obstructions.....None
Composition of the earth rod.....Metal
Depth of the earth rod.....More than 50 cm
Cross sectional area of the earthing wire.....More than 1.3 mm2
Notes
284
Installation Manual
The above figures are recommendations only.

The length of earth rod and the required depth depend on the composition of the soil.
6.3 Installation of the Trunk Cards KX-TDA30
6.3
Installation of the Trunk Cards KX-TDA30
6.3.1
LCOT4 Card
Function
4-port analogue trunk card with 2 power failure transfer (PFT) ports. One CID4 card can be
mounted on the LCOT4 card (refer to "6.3.3 CID4 Card").
PFT Port 2
PFT Port 1
RJ45
To trunk

Accessory (included): Extension Bolt 1, Strap 1
User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector or RJ11 connector
Notice
The connector type may be RJ45 or RJ11 depending on the country/area.
Notes
Pin Assignments
RJ45 Connector
TR
TR
16
Signal Name
Function
Ring
Tip
Reserved
Installation Manual
285
RJ11 Connector
TR
286
Installation Manual
Signal Name
Function
Ring
Tip
Reserved
6.3.2
LCOT2 Card
Function
2-port analogue trunk card with 2 power failure transfer (PFT) ports.
PFT Port 2
PFT Port 1
RJ45
To trunk

Notes
Pin Assignments
RJ45 Connector
TR
TR
16
Signal Name
Function
Ring
Tip
Reserved
Installation Manual
287
6.3.3
CID4 Card
Function
4-port Caller ID signal type FSK/FSK (with Call Waiting Caller ID [Visual Caller ID])/DTMF. To
be mounted on the LCOT4 card.
CID4 Card
LCOT4 Card

Note
If you need to remove the CID4 Card:
288
Installation Manual
6.3.4
BRI2 Card
Function
2-port ISDN Basic Rate Interface card with 1 power failure transfer (PFT) port. EURO-ISDN/
ETSI compliant.
RJ45 (LINE 1)
RJ45 (LINE 2)
LED 1
LED 2
To NT1/Extension
OR

Notes
This optional service card has 100
of terminal resistance. For use in point to multipoint connection, the card must be placed at the end of the bus.
Notice
If the connected ISDN terminal has no external power source, make sure that the power
is supplied from the BRI2 card by programming the Hybrid IP-PBX accordingly.
However, if there is an external power source to the terminal, make sure that there is no
power supplied to the terminal from the BRI2 card. Failure to do so may cause damage to
the power supply circuit of the BRI2 card or the terminal.
Switch Settings
Switch
Type
A/B
Slide
Installation Manual
289
Pin Assignments
TX1(+)
RX2(+)
RX1(-)
TX2(-)
Signal Name
Level [V]
Function
TX1
(+)
Transmit data 1
RX2
(+)
Receive data 2
RX1
(-)
Receive data 1
TX2
(-)
Transmit data 2
Reserved
Signal Name
Level [V]
Function
RX2
(+)
Receive data 2
TX1
(+)
Transmit data 1
TX2
(-)
Transmit data 2
RX1
(-)
Receive data 1
Reserved
RX2(+)
TX1(+)
TX2(-)
RX1(-)
LED Indications
Indication
Colour
Description
LINE 1
Green
LINE 1 status indication:

LINE 2
Green
LINE 2 status indication:

LINE LED Pattern
290
L1
L2
Master
Clock
OFF
OFF
OFF
1s
ON
OFF
OFF
1s
Installation Manual
LED Pattern
L1
L2
Master
Clock
LED Pattern
ON
ON
OFF
1s
ON
OFF
ON
1s
ON
ON
ON
1s
L1: ON (Synchronous)
L2: ON (Link established)/OFF (Link not established)
Master Clock: ON (Master)/OFF (Slave)
Maximum Cabling Distance of S0 Bus Connection

The maximum distance of the extension cable that connects the Hybrid IP-PBX and the ISDN
terminal equipment (TE) is shown below:
CAT 5: Under 1000 m
Point-to-Point
TE
CAT 5: Under 150 m
TE 1
CAT 5: Under 500 m
TE 1
Point-to-Multipoint
TE 8
CAT 5: Under 50 m
Expansion
Point-to-Multipoint
TE 8
Installation Manual
291
6.3.5
IP-GW4 Card
Function
4-channel VoIP gateway card. VoIP H.323 V.2, ITU-T G.729a, G.723.1 and G.711 compliant.
RJ45
LEDs
To private
IP network

Notes
For programming instructions and other information about the IP-GW4 card, refer to
the documentation for the IP-GW4 card.
Pin Assignments
RJ45 Connector (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
Signal Name Input (I)/Output (O) Function
TPO+
TPOTPI+
TPI-
292
Installation Manual
TPO+
Transmit data+
TPO-
Transmit data-
TPI+
Receive data+
TPI-
Receive data-
Reserved
LED Indications
Indication
Colour
Description
ON LINE
Green
ON: On-line mode
OFF: Off-line mode
Flashing: Maintenance mode

Note
If the LINK indicator is OFF, the ON LINE indicator will also be
OFF.
ALARM
Red
Alarm indication
ON: Alarm
OFF: Normal
LINK
Green
ON: Normal Connection
OFF: Connection Error
DATA
Green
Installation Manual
293
6.4 Installation of the Extension Cards KX-TDA30
6.4
Installation of the Extension Cards KXTDA30
6.4.1
DLC4 Card
Function
4-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSS consoles, a Voice Processing System (VPS), and
PT-interface CSs.
RJ45
To extension

Notice
Note
For details about connecting the CS, refer to "6.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid
IP-PBX".
Pin Assignments
RJ45 Connector
D2 D1
D2 D1
294
Installation Manual
16
Signal Name
Function
D1
Data port (High)
D2
Data port (Low)
Reserved
RJ11 Connector
D2
D1
Signal Name
Function
D1
Data port (High)
D2
Data port (Low)
Reserved
Installation Manual
295
6.4.2
SLC4 Card
Function
RJ45
To extension

Notice
Pin Assignments
RJ45 Connector
RT
RT
16
Signal Name
Function
Tip
Ring
Reserved
Signal Name
Function
Tip
Ring
Reserved
RJ11 Connector
RT
296
Installation Manual
6.4.3
DLC8 Card
Function
8-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSS consoles, a VPS, and PT-interface CSs.
RJ45
To extension

Notice
Note
For details about connecting the CS, refer to "6.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid
IP-PBX".
Pin Assignments
RJ45 Connector
D2 D1
D2 D1
D2 D1
D2 D1
16
17
24
25
32
Signal Name
Function
D1
Data port (High)
D2
Data port (Low)
Reserved
Installation Manual
297
RJ11 Connector
298
Installation Manual
D2
D1
Signal Name
Function
D1
Data port (High)
D2
Data port (Low)
Reserved
6.4.4
SLC8 Card
Function
RJ45
To extension

Notice
Pin Assignments
RJ45 Connector
RT
RT
RT
16
17
RT
24
25
32
Signal Name
Function
Tip
Ring
Reserved
RJ11 Connector
RT
Signal Name
Function
Tip
Ring
Reserved
Installation Manual
299
6.5 Installation of the Other Cards KX-TDA30
6.5
Installation of the Other Cards KX-TDA30
6.5.1
DPH4 Card
Function
4-port doorphone card for 4 doorphones and 4 door openers.
10-pin
8-pin
To door openers
To doorphones
Telephone Line Cord

Accessory (included): Extension Bolt 1, Strap 1, 8-pin terminal block 1, 10-pin
terminal block 1, Telephone Line Cord 2, Terminal Box 1 (for
DPH4 card with RJ45 connectors) or 2 (for DPH4 card with RJ11
connectors)
Notice
Shown above is a card having the RJ45 connectors.
Note
For details about connection to doorphones and door openers, refer to "6.9.1 Connection
of Doorphones and Door Openers".
300
Installation Manual
Pin Assignments
RJ45 Connector
DP2
DP1
com1
com2
DP4
DP3
com3
com4
Signal Name
Function
DP2
DP1
com1
Doorphone 1 receive
com2
Doorphone 2 receive
DP4
DP3
com3
Doorphone 3 receive
com4
Doorphone 4 receive
Reserved
Signal Name
Function
DP2
DP1
com1
Doorphone 1 receive
com2
Doorphone 2 receive
DP4
DP3
com3
Doorphone 3 receive
com4
Doorphone 4 receive
Signal Name
Function
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
16
RJ11 Connector
DP2
DP1
com1
com2
DP4
DP3
com3
com4
Installation Manual
301
OP1b
OP1a
OP2b
OP2a
OP3b
OP3a
OP4b
OP4a
302
Installation Manual
10
Signal Name
Function
OP1b
Door opener 1
OP1a
Door opener 1 com
OP2b
Door opener 2
OP2a
Door opener 2 com
OP3b
Door opener 3
OP3a
Door opener 3 com
OP4b
Door opener 4
OP4a
Door opener 4 com
Reserved
6.5.2
DPH2 Card
Function
2-port doorphone card for 2 German type doorphones and 2 door openers.
RJ45
10-pin
8-pin
To doorphones/
door openers
Telephone Line Cord

Accessory (included): Extension Bolt 1, Strap 1, 8-pin terminal block 1, 10-pin
terminal block 1, Telephone Line Cord 2, Terminal Box 1
Note
For details about connection to doorphones and door openers, refer to "6.9.1 Connection
of Doorphones and Door Openers".
Installation Manual
303
Pin Assignments
RJ45 Connector
OP1b
OP2b
OP1a
OP2a
Path_1b
Path_2b
Path_1a
Path_2a
Call_1b
Call_2b
Call_1a
Call_2a
DC1b
DC2b
DC1a
DC2a
16
Signal Name
Function
OP1b
Door opener 1
OP1a
Door opener 1 com
Path_1b
Path_1a
Doorphone 1 receive
Call_1b
Call_1a
DC1b
Doorphone control 1
DC1a
OP2b
Door opener 2
OP2a
Door opener 2 com
Path_2b
Path_2a
Doorphone 2 receive
Call_2b
Call_2a
DC2b
Doorphone control 2
DC2a
Signal Name
Function
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
304
Installation Manual
10
Signal Name
Function
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Installation Manual
305
6.5.3
ECHO8 Card
Function
8-channel card for echo cancellation during conferences.

Accessory (included): Extension Bolt 1, Screw 1
Note
To establish a conference call involving 6 to 8 parties, install an ECHO8 card and enable
the echo cancellation for conference using the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console (refer to
"7.3.3 Hybrid IP-PBX Configuration").
306
Installation Manual
6.5.4
MSG2 Card
Function
2-channel message card.

Installation Manual
307
6.5.5
EXT-CID Card
Function
Sends Caller ID signals to extension ports.

308
Installation Manual
6.5.6
MEC Card
Function
Memory expansion card for Broadcasting features and to double the number of DPTs, using
Digital XDP connection. To be installed in the MEC slot.
MEC Card
MEC Slot

CAUTION
Make sure to insert the MEC card between the guide rails until it locks into the MEC slot.
Push the card firmly into place until you hear a clicking sound.
Installation Manual
309
Removing the MEC Card

Pull open the guide rails using a flathead screwdriver and, while holding them open, remove
the MEC card.
310
Installation Manual
6.5.7
RMT Card
Function
Analogue modem card for remote communication with the Hybrid IP-PBX. V90 support. To be
installed in the RMT slot.
RMT Card
RMT Slot

CAUTION
Make sure to insert the RMT card between the guide rails until it locks into the RMT slot.
Push the card firmly into place until you hear a clicking sound.
Installation Manual
311
Removing the RMT Card

Pull open the guide rails using a flathead screwdriver and, while holding them open, remove
the RMT card.
312
Installation Manual
6.6 Connection of Extensions KX-TDA30
6.6
Connection of Extensions KX-TDA30
6.6.1
Maximum Cabling Distances of the Extension Wiring

(Twisted Cable)
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
Maximum Distance
Under 222 m
Under 347 m
Under 500 m
Under 347 m
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
Maximum Distance
Under 500 m
Under 720 m
Under 830 m
Under 720 m
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
Maximum Distance
Under 140 m
Under 229 m
Under 360 m
Under 229 m
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
Maximum Distance
Under 698 m
Under 1128 m
Under 1798 m
Under 1128 m
PT-interface
CS
DPT
APT
PT-interface CS
KX-T7600 Series
Other PT and
DSS Console
SLT
DSS
Console
SLT
Super Hybrid Ports

(Main Board)
SLC4, SLC8 Cards
DLC4, DLC8 Cards
"
" indicates that the extension card or Super Hybrid Ports support the terminal.
Installation Manual
313
6.6.2

Any SLT can be connected in parallel with an APT or a DPT as follows.
Note
In addition to an SLT, an answering machine, a fax machine or a modem (PC) can be
connected in parallel with an APT or a DPT.
With APT
To a Super Hybrid Port
Modular
T-Adaptor
Connect pins "T", "R", "D1",
and "D2".
APT
SLT
With DPT
Parallel mode or eXtra Device Port (XDP) mode can be selected through system programming.
If the XDP mode is enabled through system programming, parallel connection is not possible.
Refer to "1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone" and "2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration" in the Feature
Guide for further information.

Modular
T-Adaptor
"D2".
DPT
314
Installation Manual
SLT

With KX-T7600 Series DPT (except KX-T7665)

"D1" and "D2".
SLT
DPT
TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
TO TEL

To SLT
With Other DPT (except KX-T7560 and KX-T7565)



"D1" and "D2".
DPT
SLT
TO TEL
TO EMSS or TO MAIN UNIT

To SLT
Installation Manual
315
6.6.3

A DPT can be connected to another DPT on the Digital XDP connection. In addition, if the DPT
is connected to a Super Hybrid Port, it can also have an SLT connected in Parallel mode or
XDP mode.
Notes
Both DPTs must be KX-T7600 series DPTs (excluding KX-T7640).

Parallel mode or XDP mode can be selected through system programming.
If XDP mode is enabled through system programming, parallel connection is not
possible. Refer to "1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone" and "2.1.1 Extension Port
Configuration" in the Feature Guide for further information.
With KX-T7600 Series DPT (except KX-T7600E Series)

To DLC4/DLC8 card
Modular
T-Adaptor



"D2".
SLT
Master DPT
Slave DPT
Back View of DPTs

TO TEL
TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
Maximum Distance
Under 30 m
Under 50 m
Under 60 m
Under 50 m
Master DPT
To DLC4/DLC8 card
316
Installation Manual
Slave DPT

To DLC4/DLC8 card

"D1" and "D2".

"D1" and "D2".
Master DPT
Slave DPT
SLT
Back View of DPTs

TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
TO TEL
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
Maximum Distance
Under 30 m
Under 50 m
Under 60 m
Under 50 m
TO TEL
Master DPT
To DLC4/DLC8 card
Slave DPT
To SLT

Installation Manual
317
With KX-T7600E Series DPT

To DLC4/DLC8 card
Modular
T-Adaptor



SLT
Master DPT
Slave DPT
Back View of DPTs

TO DIGITAL
TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
Maximum Distance
Under 30 m
Under 50 m
Under 60 m
Under 50 m
Master DPT
To DLC4/DLC8 card
318
Installation Manual
Slave DPT

Connecting to a Slave DPT
To DLC4/DLC8 card

"D1" and "D2".

"D1" and "D2".
Master DPT
Slave DPT
SLT
Back View of DPTs

TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
TO DIGITAL
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
Maximum Distance
Under 30 m
Under 50 m
Under 60 m
Under 50 m
TO TEL
Master DPT
To DLC4/DLC8 card
Slave DPT
To SLT

Installation Manual
319
Connecting to a Master DPT
To DLC4/DLC8 card

"D1" and "D2".
Master DPT
Slave DPT

SLT
Back View of DPTs
TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
To DLC4/DLC8 card
To slave DPT
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
320
Installation Manual
Maximum Distance
Under 30 m
Under 50 m
Under 60 m
To SLT
Under 50 m
TO DIGITAL
TO TEL

CTI connection between a PC and a KX-T7633/T7636 DPT provides first party call control. The
CTI connection is made via a USB interface (version 1.1), and uses the CSTA Phase 3
protocol.
A USB Module (KX-T7601) must be connected to the KX-T7633/T7636 DPT.
Note
The operating system of the PC required for first party call control depends on your CTI
application software. For details, refer to the manual for your CTI application software.
To PC
USB Cable
USB Port
L
UL
6.6.4
USB Module
Notes
Maximum length of the USB cable is 3 m.

USB Modules must not be connected to DPTs in the Digital XDP connection. In a
Digital XDP connection, the PC cannot be used. If a USB module is connected to a
slave DPT, the DPT will not work properly.
Installation Manual
321
6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations KX-TDA30
6.7
Connection of DECT Portable Stations

KX-TDA30
6.7.1
Overview
CS: Cell Station (KX-TDA0141CE)

This unit determines the area covered by the wireless system. Up to 2 calls can be made at
the same time through each CS.
Note for users in Europe
This Cell Station Unit for DECT is for connection to a Panasonic PBX of a European
country.
PS: DECT Portable Station (KX-TCA155/KX-TCA255/KX-TD7590/KX-TD7580)

The KX-TDA30 can support up to 28 PSs. For more details about the PS, please refer to the
PS Operating Instructions.
RF Specification
Item
Description
Radio Access Method
Multi Carrier TDMA-TDD
Frequency Band
1880 MHz to 1900 MHz*1
Number of Carriers
10*2
Carrier Spacing
1728 kHz
Bit Rate
1152 kbps
Carrier Multiplex
TDMA, 24 (Tx12, Rx12) slots per frame
Frame Length
10 ms
Modulation Scheme
GFSK
Roll-off factor=0.5
50 % roll-off in the transmitter
Data Coding for Modulator
Differential Coding
Voice CODEC
32 kbps ADPCM (CCITT G.721)
Transmission Output
Average 10 mW
Peak 250 mW
*1
*2
The number may vary depending on the country/area. In Taiwan, it is 1880 MHz to 1895 MHz.
The number may vary depending on the country/area. In Taiwan, it is 8.
CAUTION
322
Installation Manual
sunlight.

Do not use this wireless system near another high power cordless system such as
DECT or SS wireless.
Keep the distances listed below between equipment in order to prevent noise,
interference or the disconnection of a conversation. (The distance may vary
depending on the environment.)
Equipment
Distance

fax machine, etc., or microwaves
CS and PS
More than 1 m
Each PS
More than 0.5 m
More than 2 m
Too many CSs in a small area can cause problems due to conflicts over which signal
channels each CS can use. Ideally, CSs should be a minimum of 25 m to 40 m apart.
Installation Manual
323
6.7.2
Procedure Overview
When connecting the wireless system, use extreme care to conduct a site survey. Site surveys
can be conducted using the KX-TCA255 or KX-TD7590 PS. Inadvertent site survey can result
in poor service area, frequent noise, and disconnection of calls.


2. Prepare for site survey

a. Check and assign the CS ID number to the PS.

b. Assign a channel number to each CS by setting the DIP switches on the back of the
CS.
c. Supply electricity to each CS using an AC adaptor or a battery box.

d. Install each CS temporarily as planned.
Notes


Refer to "6.7.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TD7590".

Using the KX-TCA255
To survey
specific channel
1

Channel No.
Display example:
RADIO STRENGTH
<<< MEASURING >>>
0 to 9
RADIO STRENGTH
CH0 SLOT:06 SYNC
L:12 0000/0100
CS-ID:9005301234
Using the KX-TD7590

To survey
specific channel
1

Channel No.
Display example:
RADIO STRENGTH
<<< MEASURING >>>
0 to 9
CH0 SLOT:06 SYNC

L:12 0000/0100
CS-ID:9005301234
324
Installation Manual

b. Turn off the PS.

CS.

Installation Manual
325
6.7.3
Site Planning


CS
1. Reflection
Column
2. Diffraction
3. Penetration
326
them.
Installation Manual
Object
Material
Wall
Concrete

penetrate them.
Ferroconcrete

Glass
Window
reflected.
Glass covered with
heat-resistant film

Floor
Ferroconcrete

Partition
Steel

them.
Plywood, Glass
Ferroconcrete

or diffracted.
Metal
Steel

Wood

weakened.
Column
Cabinet
Installation Manual
327
CS Coverage Area
no obstacle.
Note
Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TD7590").
Coverage Area
greater than "3".
B
B
Gray Zone:
intermittent
Good Coverage Area

Good conversation
will be kept.
Out of Service:

Level: 00
Level: 01 to 02
Level: 03 to 07
Level: 08 to 10
Level: 11 to 12
Out of range
May receive noise
Good
Better

example.
328
Installation Manual
b. If 1 CS cannot cover the entire service area, install additional CSs as required.
be lost.


150 m
70 m
CS no. 1
CS no. 2
CS no. 5
CS no. 3
CS no. 4
Installation Manual
329
6.7.4
Before Site Survey

Use the KX-TCA255 or KX-TD7590 PS to conduct the site survey.
Note
Checking the CS ID Number

Check the CS ID number label attached to the CS.
Assigning the CS ID Number to the PS

Using the KX-TCA255
To enter letters
ABC

A:
C:
ABC
E:
GHI
B:
D:
DEF
F:
JKL
CS No.
CS ID No.
0 to 7
0 to 9 and A to F
Note
To clear one by one
CS No.
0 to 7
1
DEF
3

OR

330
Installation Manual
Using the KX-TD7590

To enter letters
ABC

A:
F1
C:
F3
E:
B:
F2
D:
INT'
F:
CS No.
CS ID No.
0 to 7
0 to 9 and A to F
OK
Note
To clear one by one
CS No.
0 to 7
1
DEF
3

OR

Installation Manual
331

2. Set the channel number switches as desired.
DIP Switch
OFF
ON
1
2
Channel Number Switch
3
4
5
6
Radio Signal
Test Switch
Channel 0
Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9
Notes
332
Installation Manual
To see the radio signal strength of more than 1 CS, a channel number must be set for
each CS.
If more than 1 CS is in Radio Signal Test mode, each CS must have a unique channel
number.
supply adaptor.
Note for users in the United Kingdom
240 V AC must not be used on a building site. Instead of an AC adaptor, connect a
battery box to the CS.
Telephone Cord
Modular

(PSZZ1TDA0142)
Installation Manual
333
6.7.5

The PS has a Radio Signal Test mode that monitors the state of the radio link to the CS for site
survey. In the Radio Signal Test mode, the frame loss and signal strength of a synchronous
slot, and the signal strength of the other slots can be measured when the PS is monitoring the
CS. After installing the CSs temporarily as planned during site planning, set the PS to the
Radio Signal Test mode and locate each CS to measure its coverage area. Then, record the
results on the map of the installation site.

After locating the CS(s) temporarily, execute the Radio Signal Test using the PS. The PS scans
whether there is a CS that can link with on channel 0 right after entering the Radio Signal Test
mode. The channel to be scanned can be changed by pressing the appropriate keys 0 through
9.

Using the KX-TCA255
9

Channel No.
Previous or Next
0 to 9
Display example:

RADIO STRENGTH
<<< MEASURING >>>
RADIO STRENGTH
L:12*4 0000/0100*5
CS-ID:9005301234
Log No.
0 to 9
Using the KX-TD7590

9

Channel No.
Previous or Next
0 to 9
Display example:
RADIO STRENGTH
<<< MEASURING >>>

L:12*4 0000/0100*5
CS-ID:9005301234
Log No.
0 to 9
Notes
*1: Channel number
*2: Slot number
*3: When a slot is synchronised, "SYNC" is displayed.
*4: Radio signal strength level
*5: Frame error (0000 to 9999)/Frame counter (0000 to 9999). Frame error indicates the
number of errors out of 10 000 radio signal receptions. An increased number of frame
errors indicates greater radio signal interference and more frequent noise during
conversation. The ideal number of frame error is "0000".
CAUTION
Storing the scan data will clear all directory data.
334
Installation Manual
PS
Channel no. 0
CH0
L:12
PS
CH0
L:08
PS
CH0
L:03

Level: 00
Level: 01 to 02
Level: 03 to 07
Level: 08 to 10
Level: 11 to 12
Out of range
May receive noise
Good
Better
m to 10 m.
Channel no. 0
5 m to 10 m
Channel no. 1
Installation Manual
335
Channel no. 0
Channel no. 1
Channel no. 2
Channel no. 3
Notes
336
Installation Manual
If a channel is set, the results of measurement for the 24 slots on the channel are
saved each time. If the same channel is set, the new results override the previous
ones. Therefore, a measurement of 10 channels 24 slots in total can be made.
If correct results cannot be obtained (e.g., there are many error counters), change the
location of the CS and repeat the site survey to select the best location.

Using the KX-TCA255
9
Log No.
0 to 9

Channel No.
Previous or Next
0 to 9
A a
Using the KX-TD7590

1
Log No.
0 to 9

Channel No.
Previous or Next
0 to 9
Clearing the Stored Scan Data

When "CLEAR SCAN DATA" is displayed after turning on the PS, you are required to clear the
scan data.
Using the KX-TCA255
1
GHI
GHI

Using the KX-TD7590

1

Installation Manual
337
6.7.6
After Site Survey


OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
338
Installation Manual
ON
6.7.7

Super Hybrid Port

Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
Maximum Distance
Under 222 m
Under 347 m
Under 500 m
Under 347 m
A Super Hybrid Port,

or DLC4/DLC8 card (RJ45)
Signal Name
D2
D1
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Signal Name
Pin No.
D1
1
2
3
4
D2
CS (RJ11)
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
Signal Name
D1
D2
CS (RJ11)
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
Signal Name
D1
D2

Note
For details about DLC4 card or DLC8 card, refer to "6.4.1 DLC4 Card" or "6.4.3 DLC8
Card".
Installation Manual
339
Connecting the CS
1. Connect the cable from a Super Hybrid Port or the DLC4/DLC8 card to the CS.
Modular
To a Super Hybrid Port,
or DLC4/DLC8 card
preference).
TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX

or DLC4/DLC8 card
340
Installation Manual
Registering the PS
Note
Entering the Hybrid IP-PBX System Programming Mode Using a PT

Administrator Level
#
PROGRAM/
PAUSE

for PT Programming
Programming No.
= 1234
3 digits
Note
means default value.
PS Registration
[690]
ENTER
PS No.
Extn. No.
001 to 028
1 to 4 digits
ENTER
To the PS
operation
below
END
Press POWER
for 2 seconds.
Select
"Setting Handset".
Select
"Registration".
"Please wait".
Select
"Register H/set".
"Enter Base PIN".
Select
"Base 14".

4 digits
C.Tone
Installation Manual
341
Using the KX-TD7590

System lock can be set after PS registration. When system lock is enabled, the system
lock password will be required for system setting.
F
Press POWER
for 5 seconds.
To register for the first time
SELECT
/
Select
"INITIAL SETTING".
OR
To re-register
If required
SELECT
/
Select
"PS-PROGRAM".
Select
"REGISTRATION".
/OK

SELECT
SELECT
4 digits
SELECT
/
Select
"DECT-SYS1-4"
PIN for
PS Registration
/OK
C.Tone
4 digits
To set system lock

SELECT
/
Choose
"ENABLE/DISABLE".
4 digits
DISABLE
/OK
ENABLE
/OK
4 digits
Using the KX-TD7580
/
Press POWER
for 2 seconds.
/
Select
"Register H/set".
342
Installation Manual
Select
"Setting Handset".
/
Select
"Base 14".
/
Select
"Registration".
PIN for
PS Registration
4 digits
C.Tone

Notes
[692]

1 to 4 digits
1234
ENTER
END
ENTER
Changing the Display Language of the PS

Press POWER
for 2 seconds.
Select
"Setting Handset".
Select
"Select Language".
Select
"Display Option".
Select the desired

language.
Using the KX-TD7590

F
Press POWER
for 5 seconds.
SELECT
Select
"DISPLAY SETTING".
SELECT
SELECT
/
Select
"LANGUAGE".
SELECT
/
Select the desired
language.
Using the KX-TD7580
/
Press POWER
for 2 seconds.
Select
"Setting Handset".
Select "Select
Language".
Select the desired

language.
Select
"Display Option".
Installation Manual
343
PS Termination
PS is turned on.
[691]
PS No.
001 to 028
ENTER
ENTER

CLEAR
YES
Press "CLEAR".
To the PS
operation
below
END
Press "YES".

Press POWER
for 2 seconds.
Select
"Setting Handset".
Select
"Registration".
Select
"Cancel Base".
Handset PIN
C.Tone
4 digits
Select
"Base 14".
Select
"YES".
Using the KX-TD7590

F
SELECT
Press POWER
for 5 seconds.
If required
/
Select the
desired item.
Select "CANCEL
DECT-SYS".
4 digits
SELECT
SELECT
/OK
SELECT
C.Tone
Select "YES".
Using the KX-TD7580
/
Press POWER
for 2 seconds.
Handset PIN
Select
"Cancel Base".
4 digits
Select the
desired item.
Installation Manual
Select
"Registration".
Select "YES".
344
Select
"Setting Handset".
C.Tone

Installation Manual
345
6.7.8
Wall Mounting
screw positions.

Notes
346
Installation Manual

71 mm
Note
Installation Manual
347
6.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations KX-TDA30
6.8
Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations

KX-TDA30
6.8.1
Overview
CS: Cell Station (KX-TDA0141)

This unit determines the area covered by the wireless system. Up to 2 calls can be made at
the same time through each CS.
PS: 2.4 GHz Portable Station (KX-TD7680/KX-TD7690)

The KX-TDA30 can support up to 28 PSs. For more details about the PS, refer to the PS
Operating Instructions.
CAUTION
sunlight.
Systems using 2.4 GHz ISM (Industrial, Scientific and Medical) band may interfere
with the KX-TDA wireless system. Examples of such systems are cordless
telephones, wireless LAN, Home RF, microwave ovens and other ISM devices. These
systems may cause minor noise.
Keeping some distance between the equipment listed below may prevent
interference. (The distance may vary depending on the environment.)
Equipment
Distance

fax machine, etc.
CS and PS
More than 1 m
Each PS
More than 0.5 m
More than 2 m
CS and CS
More than 15 m
Please take into consideration the distance between the CSs when site planning.
Please consult a certified dealer for details.
348
Installation Manual
6.8.2
Procedure Overview
When connecting the wireless system, use extreme care to conduct a site survey. Inadvertent
site survey can result in poor service area, frequent noise, and disconnection of calls.


2. Prepare the CS for site survey

a. Assign a CS number to each CS by setting the DIP switches on the back of the CS.
b. Supply electricity to each CS using an AC adaptor or a battery box.
c. Install each CS temporarily as planned.
Notes


Refer to "6.8.5 Site Survey".

Using the KX-TD7680
Display example:
CS No.
CS NO.1 LEVEL:12
<< SEARCHING >>
SAVE:0123456789
1 to 9

Using the KX-TD7690

Display example:

CS No.
CS NO.1 LEVEL:12
<< SEARCHING >>
1 to 9
SAVE:0123456789
Installation Manual
349

b. Turn off the PS.

CS.

350
Installation Manual
6.8.3
Site Planning


CS
1. Reflection
Column
2. Diffraction
3. Penetration
them.
Installation Manual
351
Object
Material
Wall
Concrete

penetrate them.
Ferroconcrete

Glass
Window
reflected.
Glass covered with
heat-resistant film

Floor
Ferroconcrete

Partition
Steel

them.
Plywood, Glass
Ferroconcrete

or diffracted.
Metal
Steel

Wood

weakened.
Column
Cabinet
352
Installation Manual
CS Coverage Area
no obstacle.
Note
Survey").
Coverage Area
greater than "3".
B
B
Gray Zone:
intermittent
Good Coverage Area

Good conversation
will be kept.
Out of Service:

Level: 00
Level: 01 to 02
Level: 03 to 07
Level: 08 to 10
Level: 11 to 12
Out of range
May receive noise
Good
Better

example.
Installation Manual
353
b. If one CS cannot cover the entire service area, install additional CSs as required.
be lost.
If the signal from the CS fades, due to the structure of the building, there may be some
handover delay. The user will hear a range warning before handover in this case. This
also applies in the case of interference from 2.4 GHz apparatus.


150 m
70 m
CS no. 1
CS no. 2
CS no. 5
CS no. 3
354
Installation Manual
CS no. 4
6.8.4
Before Site Survey

2. Set the CS number switches as desired.
DIP Switch
OFF
ON
1
2
CS Number Switch
3
4
5
6
CS no. 1
CS no. 2
CS no. 3
CS no. 4
Radio Signal
Test Switch
CS no. 5
CS no. 6
CS no. 7
CS no. 8
CS no. 9
Notes
To see the radio signal strength of more than 1 CS, a CS number must be set for each
CS.
If more than 1 CS is in Radio Signal Test mode, each CS must have a unique CS
number.
Installation Manual
355
supply adaptor.
Telephone Cord
Modular

(PSZZ1TDA0142)
356
Installation Manual
6.8.5
Site Survey
The PS has a Radio Signal Test mode that monitors the state of the radio link to the CS. After
installing the CSs temporarily, set the PS to the Radio Signal Test mode and measure each CS
coverage area. Then, record the results on the map of the installation site.

Note

Using the KX-TD7680
Display example:
CS No.
CS NO.1 LEVEL:12*1
<< SEARCHING >>
1 to 9

SAVE:0123456789*2
Scan Data No.

0 to 9
Using the KX-TD7690

Display example:

CS No.
1 to 9
CS NO.1 LEVEL:12*1
<< SEARCHING >>
SAVE:0123456789*2
Scan Data No.

0 to 9
Notes
*1: CS number and radio signal strength level.
*2: Scan data (test result) number. Empty memory space will be indicated by a number;
stored memory space will be indicated by a "-".
Installation Manual
357
PS
CS NO.1 LEVEL:12
CS no. 1
PS
CS NO.1 LEVEL:8
PS
CS NO.1 LEVEL:3

Level: 00
Level: 01 to 02
Level: 03 to 07
Level: 08 to 10
Level: 11 to 12
Out of range
May receive noise
Good
Better
m to 10 m.
CS no. 1
358
Installation Manual
5 m to 10 m
CS no. 2
CS no. 1
CS no. 2
CS no. 3
CS no. 4

Using the KX-TD7680
Scan Data No.

0 to 9

Display example:
NO.1
CS No.2 LEVEL: 9
NO.0
NOT SAVED
Using the KX-TD7690

Scan Data No.

0 to 9
Display example:
NO.1
CS No.2 LEVEL: 9
NO.0
NOT SAVED
Installation Manual
359
Deleting the Stored Scan Data

Using the KX-TD7680
1
Scan Data No.


Using the KX-TD7690

1

Scan Data No.

360
Installation Manual
6.8.6
After Site Survey


OFF
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
Installation Manual
361
6.8.7

Super Hybrid Port

Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
Maximum Distance
Under 222 m
Under 347 m
Under 500 m
Under 347 m

Signal Name
D2
D1
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Signal Name
Pin No.
D1
1
2
3
4
D2
CS (RJ11)
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
Signal Name
D1
D2
CS (RJ11)
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
Signal Name
D1
D2

Note
For details about DLC4 card or DLC8 card, refer to "6.4.1 DLC4 Card" or "6.4.3 DLC8
Card".
362
Installation Manual
Connecting the CS
1. Connect the cable from a Super Hybrid Port or the DLC4/DLC8 card to the CS.
Modular
or DLC4/DLC8 card
preference).
TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX

or DLC4/DLC8 card
Installation Manual
363
Registering the PS
Note
Entering the System Programming Mode

PT (Administrator Level)
#
PROGRAM/
PAUSE

for PT Programming
Programming No.
= 1234
3 digits

FUNC
Press POWER
for 2 seconds.
Select
"PS PROGRAM".
Select
"SYSTEM SET".
If required
System Setting Menu
4 digits

MENU
Press POWER
for 2 seconds.
S1
SEL
Select
"PS PROGRAM".
If required
SEL
Select
"SYSTEM SETTING".
S1
ENTR

4 digits
System Setting Menu

S1
Note
means default value throughout this section.
364
Installation Manual
S1
PS Registration
[690]
ENTER
PS No.
Extn. No.
001 to 028
1 to 4 digits
ENTER
To the PS
operation
below
END
When the PS has not been registered yet

When registering the PS for the first time, it is possible to select the desired language for
the display. (You do not need to enter the PS system programming mode when registering
for the first time.)
Using the KX-TD7680
[ F2 ]
[ F3 ]
Press S2 repeatedly
language.
Press S3
for 2
seconds.
C.Tone
Press
POWER for
2 seconds.
Using the KX-TD7690

F2
F3
Press S2 repeatedly
language.
Press S3
for 2
seconds.
C.Tone
Press
POWER for
2 seconds.
When the PS has already been registered to another Hybrid IP-PBX

Using the KX-TD7680
C.Tone
Choose
"SYSTEM 14".
Select
"REGISTRATION".
Using the KX-TD7690

SEL
Select
"REGISTRATION".
S1
SEL
Choose
"SYSTEM 14".
C.Tone
S1
Installation Manual
365
Setting the System Lock

When a system lock has been set, the system lock password will be required for PS system
setting.
Using the KX-TD7680
Choose
"Enable/Disable".
Select
"SYSTEM LOCK".
4 digits
4 digits
ENABLE
DISABLE
C.Tone
Using the KX-TD7690
Select
"SYSTEM LOCK".
SEL
SEL
CHNG
S1
S1
Choose
"Enable/Disable".
ENTR
4 digits
S1
4 digits
ENABLE
S1
DISABLE
ENTR
C.Tone
S1
366
Installation Manual

Notes
[692]

ENTER
1 to 4 digits
1234
ENTER
END
Setting the PIN for PS

Using the KX-TD7680

Select
"CHANGE PIN"
C.Tone
1 to 4 digits
1234
Using the KX-TD7690

SEL
Select
"CHANGE PIN"
S1

1 to 4 digits
1234
ENTR
C.Tone
S1
Installation Manual
367
PS Termination
PS is turned on.
[691]
PS No.
001 to 028
ENTER
ENTER

CLEAR
Press "CLEAR".
YES
To the PS
operation
below
END
Press "YES".

Using the KX-TD7680
Select "YES".
Select the
desired item.
Select "DELETE
SYSTEM".
C.Tone
Using the KX-TD7690

SEL
Select "DELETE
SYSTEM".
S1
SEL
Select the
desired item.
S1
Select "YES".
SEL
C.Tone
S1

368
Installation Manual
6.8.8
Wall Mounting
screw positions.

Notes
Installation Manual
369

71 mm
Note
370
Installation Manual
6.9 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers KX-TDA30
6.9
Connection of Doorphones and Door

Openers KX-TDA30
6.9.1
Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers

A maximum of 4 doorphones (KX-T30865) and 4 door openers can be connected to the Hybrid
IP-PBX with a DPH4 card. A maximum of 2 doorphones (German type) and 2 door openers
can be connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX with a DPH2 card.
Notes
KX-T30865 is a Panasonic doorphone.

German type doorphones and door openers are user-supplied.
Maximum Cabling Distance
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
Maximum Distance
Under 70 m
Under 113 m
Under 180 m
Under 113 m
Doorphone
Door Opener
Current Limit for door opener: 24 V DC/30 V AC, 1 A maximum
Installing the Doorphone (KX-T30865)

1. Loosen the screw to separate the doorphone into 2 halves.
Pan
ason
ic
Screw
Installation Manual
371
2. Pass the wires through the hole in the base cover, and attach the base cover to a wall
using 2 screws.
Screw
To terminal box
Note
Two kinds of screws are included with KX-T30865. Please choose the appropriate kind for
your wall type.
: when a doorphone plate has been fixed to the wall
: when you wish to install the doorphone directly to the wall
3. Connect the wires to the screws located in the front cover.
To terminal box
4. Re-attach the 2 halves and re-insert the screw.
372
Installation Manual
Connection of Doorphones to the DPH4 Card with RJ45 Connectors

1. Unlatch the cover of the terminal box by inserting a flathead screwdriver into the openings
and levering the cover open. Follow the order indicated by the numbers 1 to 4.
2. Connect the wires of doorphones to the terminal box.

For details about pin assignments for the DPH4 card, refer to "6.5.1 DPH4 Card".
Terminal Box
(included with the card)
To doorphones
Pin Assignments for Terminal Box
com2
DP2
Reserved
Reserved
DP1
com1
Reserved
Reserved
com4
DP4
Reserved
Reserved
DP3
com3
Reserved
Reserved
Installation Manual
373
3. Cut and remove the appropriate parts from the cover depending on your preference.
4. Make sure to run the connected wires through the opening. Then, close the cover.
374
Installation Manual
5. Connect the terminal box to the DPH4 card in the Hybrid IP-PBX using the telephone line
cords included with the card.
To DPH4 card
Telephone Line Cord
To doorphones
Installation Manual
375
Connection of Doorphones to the DPH4 Card with RJ11 Connectors

1. Connect the DPH4 card to the terminal boxes using the telephone line cords included with
the card.
Refer to "6.5.1 DPH4 Card" for pin assignments.
2. Connect the wires of doorphones 1 and 3 to the red and green screws on the terminal box.
3. Connect the wires of doorphones 2 and 4 to the yellow and black screws on the terminal
box.
To DPH4 card
Telephone Line Cord

Terminal Box
Yellow
Red
Black
Green
Panasonic
Panasonic
Doorphone 3
Doorphone 4
Telephone Line Cord
Yellow
Red
Panasonic
Doorphone 1
376
Installation Manual
Black
Green
Panasonic
Doorphone 2
Connection of Door Openers and German Type Doorphones to DPH2

Card
1. Unlatch the cover of the terminal box by inserting a flathead screwdriver into the openings
and levering the cover open. Follow the order indicated by the numbers 1 to 4.
2. Connect the wires of door openers and doorphones to the terminal box.
For details about pin assignments for the DPH2 card, refer to "6.5.2 DPH2 Card".
Terminal Box
To doorphones/door openers
Pin Assignments for Terminal Box
Call_1a
Path_1b
OP1a
OP1b
Path_1a
Call_1b
DC1a
DC1b
Call_2a
Path_2b
OP2a
OP2b
Path_2a
Call_2b
DC2a
DC2b
Installation Manual
377
3. Cut and remove the appropriate parts from the cover depending on your preference.
4. Make sure to run the connected wires through it. Then, close the cover.
378
Installation Manual
5. Connect the terminal box to the DPH2 card in the Hybrid IP-PBX using the telephone line
cords included with the card.
To DPH2 card
Telephone Line Cord
To doorphones/door openers
Installation Manual
379
Connection of Door Openers to DPH4 Card

Use 10-pin terminal block (included with the card) for connection.
1. While pressing down on the hole at the top of the terminal block using a screwdriver, insert
the wire into the side hole as shown below. Repeat this procedure for other door openers.
Refer to "6.5.1 DPH4 Card" for pin assignments.
Door Opener
2. Attach the terminal block to the connector of the DPH4 card in the Hybrid IP-PBX.
To door openers
380
Installation Manual
6.10 Connection of Peripherals KX-TDA30

6.10.1 Connection of Peripherals
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
Maximum Distance
Under 10 m
Under 10 m
Under 10 m
Under 10 m
BGM/
Music on Hold
Cable
0.4 mm:
0.5 mm:
0.6 mm:
CAT 5:
Maximum Distance
Under 10 m
Under 10 m
Under 10 m
Under 10 m
Maximum Distance
Under 2 m
Maximum Distance
Under 5 m
Pager:
Amplifier/Speaker
PC
Printer
PC
BGM/MOH
The Hybrid IP-PBX provides Background Music and Music on Hold. Only 1 external music
source (e.g., a user-supplied radio) can be connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX.
CAUTION
Wiring should be done carefully to prevent undue force being exerted on the plug.
Otherwise, music may intermittent.
An External Music Jack is an SELV port and should only be connected to an approved
SELV device, or in Australia, via the Line Isolation Unit with the Telecommunications
Compliance Label.
Note
When the Hybrid IP-PBX and external music sources are not connected to the same
earth, hum noise may be induced into Background Music and Music on Hold.
Installation Manual
381
Pager
Only 1 paging device (user-supplied) can be connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX.
CAUTION
An External Paging Jack is an SELV port and should only be connected to an approved
SELV device, or in Australia, via the Line Isolation Unit with the Telecommunications
Compliance Label.
PC/Printer (via RS-232C)

The Hybrid IP-PBX is equipped with an RS-232C interface. This interface provides
communication between the Hybrid IP-PBX and the user-supplied devices such as PC or line
printers. The RS-232C port is used for system programming, SMDR, diagnostics and external
system database storage (save/load) functions.
Note
Use an RS-232C cross cable for connection between the Hybrid IP-PBX and PC.
Pin Assignments
Circuit Type
No.
Signal Name
Function
EIA
CCITT
RD (RXD)
Receive Data
BB
104
3
4
SD (TXD)
ER (DTR)
Transmit Data
Data Terminal Ready
BA
CD
103
108.2
5
6
SG
DR (DSR)
Signal Ground
Data Set Ready
AB
CC
102
107
7
8
RS (RTS)
CS (CTS)
Request To Send
Clear To Send
CA
CB
105
106
Connection Charts
Hybrid IP-PBX
382
Printer/PC
Circuit Type
(EIA)
Signal
Name
Pin No.
Pin No.
Signal
Name
Circuit Type
(EIA)
BB
RD (RXD)
RD (RXD)
BB
BA
SD (TXD)
SD (TXD)
BA
CD
ER (DTR)
ER (DTR)
CD
AB
SG
SG
AB
CC
DR (DSR)
DR (DSR)
CC
CA
RS (RTS)
RS (RTS)
CA
CB
CS (CTS)
CS (CTS)
CB
Installation Manual
Hybrid IP-PBX
Printer/PC
Circuit Type
(EIA)
Signal
Name
Pin No.
Pin No.
Signal
Name
Circuit Type
(EIA)
BB
RD (RXD)
FG
AA
BA
SD (TXD)
RD (RXD)
BB
CD
ER (DTR)
SD (TXD)
BA
AB
SG
20
ER (DTR)
CD
CC
DR (DSR)
SG
AB
CA
RS (RTS)
CS (CTS)
CB
CB
CS (CTS)
DR (DSR)
CC
RS (RTS)
CF
RS-232C Signals
Receive Data (RXD):(input)

Conveys signals from the printer or the PC.
Transmit Data (TXD):(output)

Conveys signals from the unit to the printer or the PC. A "Mark" condition is held
unless data or BREAK signals are being transmitted.
Data Terminal Ready (DTR):(output)

This signal line is turned ON by the unit to indicate that it is ON LINE. Circuit ER (DTR)
ON does not indicate that communication has been established with the printer or the
PC. It is switched OFF when the unit is OFF LINE.
Signal Ground (SG)

Connects to the DC ground of the unit for all interface signals.
Data Set Ready (DSR):(input)

An ON condition of circuit DR (DSR) indicates the printer or the PC is ready. Circuit
DR (DSR) ON does not indicate that communication has been established with the
printer or the PC.
Request To Send (RTS):(output)

This lead is held ON whenever DR (DSR) is ON.
Clear To Send (CTS):(input)

An ON condition of circuit CS (CTS) indicates that the printer or the PC is ready to
receive data from the unit. The unit does not attempt to transfer data or receive data
when circuit CS (CTS) is OFF.
Frame Ground (FG)

Connects to the unit frame and the earth ground conductor of the AC power cord.
Installation Manual
383
PC/Server PC (via USB version 1.1)

The Hybrid IP-PBX is equipped with a USB interface. This interface provides communication
between the Hybrid IP-PBX and a PC or a Server PC.
The PC is used for system programming, diagnostics and external system database storage
(save/load) functions.
The Server PC is used for connecting PCs on a LAN to provide third party call control CTI. The
CTI connection uses the CSTA Phase 3 or TAPI 2.1 protocol.
Note
The operating system of the PC or Server PC required for third party call control depends
on your CTI application software. For details, refer to the manual for your CTI application
software.
Pin Assignments
No.
384
Installation Manual
Signal Name
VBUS
USB D-
USB D+
GND
6.11 Power Failure Connections KX-TDA30

6.11.1 Power Failure Connections
When the power supply to the Hybrid IP-PBX fails, power failure transfer (PFT) will switch from
the current connection to the Power Failure Connection. Refer to "2.4.1 Power Failure Transfer"
in the Feature Guide for further information.
Power Failure Connection is required to implement this feature.
Note
While DC power is provided by the backup batteries, the Hybrid IP-PBX will remain fully
operational and the connection will not switch to the Power Failure Connection.
Using Analogue Trunk Card and Super Hybrid Ports

In the event of power failure, SLTs connected to Ports 1 and 2 of the Super Hybrid Ports (on
the Main Board) are automatically connected to PFT ports 1 and 2 of the first LCOT2/LCOT4
card (installed in the least slot number).
Note
Even when the power returns, the conversation established during power failure will be
maintained.
Using BRI2 Card

LINE 1 and LINE 2 of the BRI2 card can be used for Power Failure Connections.
Note
When the power returns, the connection will switch back to normal configuration from the
Power Failure Connection, and a trunk conversation established during power failure will
be dropped.
Set all DIP switches

at "ON" positions.
RJ45
(LINE 1)
To NT1
RJ45
(LINE 2)
To ISDN extension
ON
ON
123 4 567 8
OFF
1 234567 8
OFF

Installation Manual
385
Switch Settings
Switch
Type
PFT Setting
DIP
Set all DIP switches to "ON" positions to use LINE 1 and

LINE 2 as a PFT port.
LINE 1: Power Failure LINE (NT1)
LINE 2: Power Failure EXTN (extension)
TX1(+)
RX2(+)
RX1(-)
TX2(-)
Signal Name
Level [V]
Function
TX1
(+)
Transmit data 1
RX2
(+)
Receive data 2
RX1
(-)
Receive data 1
TX2
(-)
Transmit data 2
Reserved
Signal Name
Level [V]
Function
RX2
(+)
Receive data 2
TX1
(+)
Transmit data 1
TX2
(-)
Transmit data 2
RX1
(-)
Receive data 1
Reserved
RX2(+)
TX1(+)
TX2(-)
RX1(-)
386
Installation Manual
6.12 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30

6.12.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX
CAUTION
SD Memory Card must be inserted in the SD Memory Card slot of the main board
before start up.
Before touching the System Initialise Switch and the Reset Button, discharge static
by touching ground or wearing an earthing strap.
Once you have started the Hybrid IP-PBX and if you unplug the Hybrid IP-PBX, do
not perform the following procedures to start the Hybrid IP-PBX again. Otherwise,
your programmed data is cleared. To restart the Hybrid IP-PBX, refer to "8.1.4 Using
the Reset Button".
The Hybrid IP-PBX will continue to be powered even if the power switch is turned
"OFF".
The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device, ensure that the socketoutlet is located/installed near the equipment and is easily accessible.
1. Set the System Initialise Switch to the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position.
RUN Indicator
ALARM Indicator
Reset Button
Installation Manual
387
2. Plug the DC connector of the AC adaptor into DC IN 1.
DC IN 1
DC Connector
1
2
AC Adaptor
Notes
The AC adaptor supplied with the Hybrid IP-PBX must be connected to DC IN 1. If an

AC adaptor is connected only to DC IN 2, the Hybrid IP-PBX will not start.
If you need to connect an additional AC adaptor, plug the DC connector of the
additional AC adaptor into DC IN 2.
DC Connector
DC IN 2
1
Additional
AC Adaptor
AC Adaptor
388
Installation Manual
3. Plug the AC cord into the AC adaptor, and then plug the other end into an AC outlet.
AC Adaptor
AC Cord
To AC outlet
4. Turn on the power switch.
Power Switch
Notes
For safety reasons, follow the procedures as indicated when turning on the Hybrid IPPBX.
For safety reasons, do not stretch, bend, or pinch the AC cord and the DC cable of
the AC adaptor.
5. Press the Reset Button with a pointed tool. (The RUN indicator will flash.)
6. While the RUN indicator is flashing (within about 10 s), return the System Initialise Switch
to the "NORMAL" position. Depending on the configuration, initialisation takes about 1 min
to 3 min. If successfully executed, the RUN indicator will stop flashing and be kept lit.
All data will be cleared, and the Hybrid IP-PBX as well as all optional service cards (except for
the IP-GW4 card) will be initialised to the default values. The DPTs should show the time as
01:00.
The data of the IP-GW4 card will not be initialised.
Note
Use the same types of AC adaptor and AC cord that are supplied with the Hybrid IP-PBX
only.
Installation Manual
389
LED Indications
Indication
Colour
Description
RUN
Green
PBX status indication
OFF: Power Off (includes normal reset)
ON: Power On and running (on-line)
Flashing (60 times per minute): Starting up
Flashing (120 times per minute): Starting up or resetting with:
the System Initialise Switch in "SYSTEM INITIALIZE"

position
the SD Memory Card not inserted
ALARM
Red
Alarm indication
OFF: Normal
ON: Alarm (CPU stop, alarm for each card)
Flashing: Alarm (MPR file error in restarting)

After initialisation, programme the Hybrid IP-PBX and establish trunk connection, and then use
a PT to confirm it.
To confirm, dial [ ] [3] [7] + trunk number (3 digits) or press S-CO button. You will hear a dial
tone if the trunk is available and connected.
Turning off the Hybrid IP-PBX

For safety reasons, make sure to turn off the power switch before unplugging the Hybrid IPPBX. To unplug, follow the reverse steps to plug it in.
390
Installation Manual
Section 7
Guide for the KX-TDA30 Maintenance
Console KX-TDA30
Explains the installation procedure, structure, and basic

information of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console.
Installation Manual
391
7.1 Overview KX-TDA30
7.1
Overview KX-TDA30
7.1.1
Overview
KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console is designed to serve as an overall system programming
reference for the Hybrid IP-PBX. To programme and administer the Hybrid IP-PBX by PC, you
need to install the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console onto the PC.
This manual describes overview and installation of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console only.
KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console*1
Menu Bar
Programme Menu
*1
The contents and design of the software are subject to change without notice.
392
Installation Manual
7.2 Connection KX-TDA30
7.2
Connection KX-TDA30
7.2.1
Connection
Serial Interface Connection
RS-232C Port
To COM Port
PC
To USB Port
PC
USB Port
Note
For pin assignments and maximum cabling distance, refer to "6.10.1 Connection of
Peripherals".
Installation Manual
393
7.2 Connection KX-TDA30
External Modem Connection

RS-232C Port
(9 pin)
To RS-232C port
(25-pin)
Modem
To trunk/Hybrid IP-PBX extension

port assigned as the trunk destination
Hybrid IP-PBX
External Modem
Signal Name
Pin No.
Pin No.
Signal Name
RD (RXD)
SD (TXD)
SD (TXD)
RD (RXD)
ER (DTR)
DR (DSR)
DR (DSR)
20
ER (DTR)
After connecting the Hybrid IP-PBX and the external modem, set the power switch of the
external modem to "ON", then the external modem will be initialised with the default values.
The following AT command settings may be required for the modem:
The Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal should be ignored.
The Data Terminal Equipment (DTE)/Modem flow control should be turned off.
The data compression should be disabled.
Error Correction is not necessary.

Notes
394
Installation Manual
Use an RS-232C straight cable for connection between the Hybrid IP-PBX and
external modem.
An AT command (for initialisation, enabling automatic answer, etc.) can only be
programmed by KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console. "AT&F0E0V1X1S10=30S12=50"
is stored as the default value.
For more information about the AT command, refer to the external modems
instructions.
7.3 Installation of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console
7.3
Installation of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance

Console
7.3.1
Installing and Starting the KX-TDA30 Maintenance

Console
System Requirements
Operating System
Microsoft Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP

Hardware
CPU: Intel Pentium 133 MHz or better microprocessor
RAM: at least 64 megabytes (MB) of free RAM (128 MB recommended)
HDD: at least 100 MB of hard disc space
Password Security
A password is required to perform programming for security purposes. Do not disclose the
password. This will avoid unauthorised access and possible dial through fraud.
Warning to the Administrator regarding the system password
1. Please inform the customer of the importance of the password and the possible
dangers.
2. Please maintain the secrecy of the password. This will avoid unauthorised access and
possible dial through fraud.
3. Please change the password periodically.

4. We strongly recommend that a password of 10 digits is used for maximum protection
against hackers.
5. If the system password is forgotten, you can examine the backup of the system
programming. Therefore, please keep your backup secure to avoid unauthorised

access.
If you have a backup of the system data, you can find the password by loading the
backup system data onto the PC and check the password using the programming
tool. For how to back up system data, refer to "7.3.4 Hybrid IP-PBX Maintenance".
If you do not have a backup system data, you have to set the PBX to the factory default
and reprogramme it. Therefore, we recommend that you back up the system data.
Installation Manual
395
Installing the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console and Selecting

Appropriate Country/Area Data
1. a.
Save the setup file of the KX-TDA30

Maintenance Console on your PC.
b. Double-click the icon to execute the

setup file.
c. Follow the instructions of the wizard.
2. a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Notes
Type the appropriate Country Code.

The KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console
will be installed with the appropriate
default data for your country/area.
Click [Next].
Follow the instructions of the wizard.
Click [Finish].
Click [OK].
To install or uninstall the software into Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP

Professional, the user must be grouped either of "Administrators" or "Power Users".
To connect the PC to the Hybrid IP-PBX via USB, the KX-TDA USB driver must have
been installed. Follow the instructions of the wizard to install the KX-TDA USB driver.
Starting the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console and Assigning the

Basic Items (Quick Setup)
When you start the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console with the Installer Level Programmer
Code and connect to the Hybrid IP-PBX for the first time after initialisation (with the factory
default setting), Quick Setup will launch automatically. During Quick Setup, you will setup the
following basic items:
Date and Time of the Hybrid IP-PBX. The date and time set on the PC will be used.
System Password for installer for PC programming.
Operator extension numbers. Operator extensions for all time modes (day/lunch/
break/night) can be assigned.
396
Installation Manual
Flexible Numbering type to pattern 1 or pattern 2. If pattern 1 (with ) is selected, " "
must prefix all feature numbers (except access numbers) when an extension user
wants to use a feature.
Operator call and Idle Line Access/ARS numbers (0 or 9). The feature numbers for
operator call and Idle Line Access/ARS can be selected.
Remote Maintenance Dial Number. Enter the complete telephone number of the PBX
(including the country code). When necessary, this number will be used to access the
PBX from a remote location for maintenance purposes.
1. Connect the PC to the Hybrid IP-PBX with a

USB cable.
2. Start the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console
from the start menu.
3. Type the Installer Level Programmer Code
(default: 1234), then click [OK].
The Programmer Code authorises different
programming levels, and the Quick Setup is
only available when you start the KX-TDA30
Maintenance Console with the Installer Level
Programmer Code.
Note
There are 2 other Programmer Codes
with limited authorisation: Administrator
Level (default: 1111), and User Level
(default: none).
4. Click "Connect"
"USB" from the menu bar.
5. Type the system password for installer

(default: 1234), then click [OK] to log-in.
6. When country/area data do not match:
a. Click [OK] to replace the country/area

data of the Hybrid IP-PBX. Replacement
may take several minutes to complete.
b. Follow the procedure described in

"6.12.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX" and
restart the Hybrid IP-PBX.
c. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to restart the KXTDA30 Maintenance Console.
Installation Manual
397
7. Follow the instructions of the wizard and

assign the basic items (Quick Setup).
The programme menu appears.
Notice
1. During a long programming session, it is highly recommended that you periodically

save the system data to the SD Memory Card. You can think of system data as stored
in RAM, whereas SD Memory Card as stored on a hard disk. If the PBX undergoes a
sudden power failure or system reset for some reason, all the system data in RAM will
be lost.
To save the system data to the SD Memory Card, (1) click the "SD Memory Backup"
icon before resetting the PBX or turning off the power, or (2) exit the KX-TDA30
Maintenance Console so that the PBX starts automatically saving the system data.
2. When the PBX is initialised, not all data is taken from the SD Memory Card. The data
for present status of extension FWD/DND buttons is taken from battery backup
memory in the PBX.
3. The PC will not perform any shutdown operation, or enter the power-saving system
standby mode while the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console is connected to the Hybrid
IP-PBX. To perform either of the operations above, first close the connection to the
Hybrid IP-PBX.
CAUTION
Do not remove the SD Memory Card during access to it. Doing so will damage the system
data, and in the worst case, damage the SD Memory Card.
398
Installation Manual
7.3.2
Structure of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console
Menu Bar
File
Connect
Tool
Utility
Diagnosis
SD Card File Delete
Error Log
ISDN/Qsig Protocol Trace
CS Information
PS Information
System Reset
Window
Help
Installation Manual
399
7.3.3

This section briefly describes how to check the configuration of the Hybrid IP-PBX using the
KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console when PC and the Hybrid IP-PBX are connected by USB
cable.
at each screen.
1. Start the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console
(refer to "Starting the KX-TDA30
Maintenance Console and Assigning the
Basic Items (Quick Setup)" in "7.3.1 Installing
and Starting the KX-TDA30 Maintenance
Console").
2. To check the slot condition of the Hybrid IPPBX:
b. Double-click "Slot".
3. To check the PS status:
b. Double-click "Portable Station".
4. To check other configurations, double-click

the other items in the same manner.
400
Installation Manual
7.3.4

This section briefly describes how to perform maintenance of the Hybrid IP-PBX using the KXTDA30 Maintenance Console when PC and the Hybrid IP-PBX are connected by USB cable.
at each screen.
1. Start the KX-TDA 30 Maintenance Console
(refer to "Starting the KX-TDA30
Maintenance Console and Assigning the
Basic Items (Quick Setup)" in "7.3.1 Installing
and Starting the KX-TDA30 Maintenance
Console").
2. To diagnose a card:
Click "Utility"
"Diagnosis" from the menu
bar.
3. a.
Click "Status" of the desired card and

change its status to "OUS".
b. Click "Card Type" of the desired card.

The diagnosis screen appears.
To use other utility commands, click the

desired item in the step 2 above.
Installation Manual
401
402
The programme files in the PC are transferred to

SD Memory Card of the Hybrid IP-PBX.
Programme files in the SD Memory Card is
overwritten in this process.

transferred to the PC.
The name, date, time, and size of programme

files in the SD Memory Card are viewed, then
these files are transferred to each CS connected
to the Hybrid IP-PBX.
SD Card File Delete

deleted.

PC are transferred to all MSG cards. Available

MSG cards are transferred to the PC. Available
Error Log
The error log is displayed (for details, refer to

"8.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log").
ISDN/Qsig Protocol Trace
Displays ISDN protocol trace data of the BRI

card.
CS Information
Displays the internal information of the CS.
PS Information
Displays the registration information of the PS.
System Reset
Resets the connected Hybrid IP-PBX. (It is the

same as pushing the Reset Button with the
System Initialise Switch in the "NORMAL"
position.) After using this command, you have to
restart the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console and
connect to the Hybrid IP-PBX again.
Installation Manual
Section 8
Troubleshooting KX-TDA30
This section provides information on the Hybrid IP-PBX

and telephone troubleshooting.
Installation Manual
403
8.1 Troubleshooting KX-TDA30
8.1
8.1.1
Installation
PROBLEM
Extension does not operate.
PROBABLE CAUSE
Bad extension card.
SOLUTION
Exchange the card for a known working one.
Bad connection between the Take the telephone and plug it into the same
Hybrid IP-PBX and
extension port using a short telephone cord.
telephone.
If the telephone works, then the connection
between the Hybrid IP-PBX and the
telephone must be repaired.
A telephone with an A-A1
relay is connected.
Use a 2-wire cord.

Set the A-A1 relay switch of the telephone to
the "OUT" or "OFF" position.
Bad telephone.
Take the telephone and plug it into another

extension port that is working. If the
telephone does not work, replace the
telephone.
The number of terminal

equipment exceeds the
capacity of the Hybrid IPPBX with the supplied AC
adaptor only.
Connect an additional AC adaptor.
Improper operation.
Press the Reset Button (refer to "8.1.4 Using

the Reset Button").
Noise on external paging.
Induced noise on the wire

between the Hybrid IP-PBX
and the amplifier.
Use a shielded cable as the connection wire

between the Hybrid IP-PBX and amplifier. A
short shielded cable is recommended.
Distorted external music.
Excessive input level from

external music source.
Decrease the output level of the external

music source by using the volume control on
the music source.
Alternate CallingRing/Voice
and Live Call Screening
(LCS) do not function as set
when using a Wireless Phone
(KX-T7880/KX-T7885/KXTD7894/KX-TD7895).
Voice-calling mode and

Hands-free mode with LCS
are not available with
Wireless Phones.
Switch the calling mode to ring-calling.

Set the LCS mode to "Private".
The ALARM indicator on the

front of the cabinet turns on
red.
A major system error occurs See the error log using the KX-TDA30
in the Hybrid IP-PBX.
Maintenance Console (refer to "8.1.5
Troubleshooting by Error Log").
404
Installation Manual
8.1.2
Connection
Connection between the Hybrid IP-PBX and a PT:
Can you dial

an extension?
CAUSE
No
SOLUTION

D1
T
R
D2
D1
T
R
D2
Hybrid IP-PBX

inner 2 wires are for T/R and
the outer 2 wires are for
D1/D2).
Extension
Connection between the Hybrid IP-PBX and an SLT:
CAUSE
SOLUTION

D1
T
R
D2
T
R
Hybrid IP-PBX
Yes
Extension

inner 2 wires are for T/R).
If a telephone equipped
with an A-A1 relay is
connected to the Hybrid
IP-PBX, set the A-A1
relay switch of the
telephone to "OFF".
Connection between the Hybrid IP-PBX and an SLT that is polarity-sensitive:
CAUSE
SOLUTION
The "T" is connected to the "R".

D1
T
R
D2
Hybrid IP-PBX
Reverse the connections of

the T/R.
T
R
Extension
(Continued on the next page.)
Installation Manual
405
Connection between the trunk and the Hybrid IP-PBX:

(Continued from the
previous page.)
Can you dial

out on a
trunk?
CAUSE
Trunk is connected to the T2/T1.
T2
R1
T1
R2
No
Trunk
Hybrid IP-PBX
Trunk is connected to the T2/R1.

T2
R1
T1
R2
Trunk
406
Installation Manual
Hybrid IP-PBX
SOLUTION
Reconnect the trunk to
the T1/R1 or T2/R2 of the
telephone jack using
2-conductor wiring.
8.1.3
Operation
PROBLEM
PROBABLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
When using the

speakerphone on an
APT, nothing is audible.
The HANDSET/
HEADSET selector is
set to the "HEADSET"
position.
When the headset is not used, set the

HANDSET/HEADSET selector to the
"HANDSET" position.
When using the

speakerphone/monitor
mode with a DPT,
nothing is audible.
The "HEADSET" mode

is selected by Personal
Programming,
"Handset/Headset
Selection".
When the headset is not used, select

the "HANDSET" mode by Personal
Programming.
The PT does not ring.
The ringer volume is off.
Turn on the ringer volume.
During a power failure,

extensions connected to
ports 1 and 2 of Super
Hybrid Ports do not
operate.
A DPT or APT is
connected to the
extension port.
The dialling mode (tone

or pulse) is incorrect.
Disconnect the DPT or APT and

connect an SLT.
Set the Tone/Pulse switch to the other
position.
Originating an outside
call, call transfer, or
conference cannot be
performed.
The corresponding CO
button does not exist on
the PT.
Programme the CO button. Refer to

"1.19.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature
Guide.
Cannot register the PS.
Wrong Personal
Identification Number
(PIN) is registered to the
PS.
Register the PIN set to the Hybrid IPPBX into the PS.
CS is not connected
properly.

PS becomes out of
range.
Cannot make calls using
the PS.
CS is not working.

Location of CS is not
good.

Access system of the

PS is not properly set.
Change the access system setting of

the PS to the appropriate system or
automatic.
Installation Manual
407
PROBLEM
408
PROBABLE CAUSE
Noise is frequent while

using the PS.
Conversations
disconnect while using
the PS.
PS stays out of service

when the CS status is
changed from Out of
Service to In Service.
Installation Manual
SOLUTION
Call handover is not
working.
PS is out of CS coverage
area.
It may take about 10 s
for CS to start up after
the status has been
changed to In Service.

Wait until the CS starts up.
8.1.4

If the Hybrid IP-PBX does not operate properly, use the Reset Button. Before using the Reset
Button, try the system feature again to confirm whether there definitely is a problem or not.
Notes
1. When the System Initialise Switch is set to "NORMAL", pressing the Reset Button
causes the following:
Camp-on is cleared.
Calls on hold are terminated.
Calls on exclusive hold are terminated.
Calls in progress are terminated.
Call park is cleared.

Other data stored in memory, except the above, are not cleared.
2. When the System Initialise Switch is set to the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position, you
must press the Reset Button with caution, because all data stored in memory will be
cleared by the following operation: (1) pressing the Reset Button and then, (2) setting
the System Initialise Switch to the "NORMAL" position while the RUN indicator is
Operation
1. If the Hybrid IP-PBX does not operate properly:
a. Make sure that the System Initialise Switch is set to the "NORMAL" position.
RUN Indicator
ALARM Indicator
Reset Button
2. If the Hybrid IP-PBX still does not operate properly:

a. Set the System Initialise Switch to the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position.
c. Return the System Initialise Switch to the "NORMAL" position while the RUN indicator
is flashing (within approximately 10 s).
Note
As a result of Step 2, all the programmed data will be cleared.
Installation Manual
409
3. If the Hybrid IP-PBX still does not work:

a. Unplug the Hybrid IP-PBX.
b. Set the System Initialise Switch to the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position.
c. Plug in the Hybrid IP-PBX after 5 min.
d. Press the Reset Button.
e. Set the System Initialise Switch to the "NORMAL" position while the RUN indicator is
410
Installation Manual
8.1.5

When a major system error occurs in the Hybrid IP-PBX, the ALARM indicator on the front of
the cabinet turns on red, and the system logs the error information.
Error Log Display Format

Below is the display format of the error log. To see the error log using the KX-TDA30
Maintenance Console, refer to "7.3.4 Hybrid IP-PBX Maintenance".
Example: KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console
Example: Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
04/01/01 10:37AM MJ ALM #000 10000 MPR WDT overflow

04/01/01 11:07AM MN ALM #010 10000 AC power down
04/01/01 03:55PM MN ALM #392 10401 Clock master card selected
1
Description
Item
Description
Date
Date of the error detection
Time
Time of the error detection
Level
Major Alarm (MJ ALM):

Errors that affect the whole system operation, or result in
system failure
Minor Alarm (MN ALM):
Errors that affect certain part of system operation
Error Code
Three-digit error code
Installation Manual
411
Item
5
Sub Code
Description
Five-digit sub code (1XXYY)
1: Cabinet number
XX: Slot number
00 to 11 (00: MPR; 01: Super hybrid ports; 02 to 11: Slots
for optional service cards)
YY: Physical port number (01 to 16)
For optional service cards that are installed in Slots 08 to
11, sub slot number + port number will be displayed.
Note
When there is no parameter for slot and physical port
number, XX and YY will be displayed as "00".
Example: Sub code for MPR = 10000
412
Error Message
Installation Manual
Error description (maximum 36 characters)
List of Errors and Solutions

The tables below list the errors and their solutions.
When an error whose error code is indicated with "*" occurs in the Hybrid IP-PBX, the ALARM
indicator on the front of the cabinet turns on red, and the system logs the error information.
When the error conditions indicated by the error codes "021", "091", "092", and "510" are
recovered, the ALARM indicator will turn off automatically, indicating successful
troubleshooting. When other errors are logged, the ALARM indicator will turn off only when the
log for major or minor errors is cleared from the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console.
In other words, the ALARM indicator will turn off under the following conditions:
When the errors "021", "091", "092", and "510" are logged: when the error
conditions are recovered
When other errors are logged: when the log for major or minor errors is cleared from
the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console
Optional Service Card Initial Self Diagnosis

Error Code
Error Message
PROBABLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
212
Echo canceller
access error

malfunction: ECHO
215
Framer IC access
error

malfunction: BRI
216
MSG card DSP

error

malfunction: MSG
217
MSG card data

error

malfunction: MSG
Erroneous recording of
messages

service card
Re-record the messages
service card
System Start-up and On-line Operation

Error Code
Error Message
PROBABLE CAUSE
000*
MPR WDT
overflow
001
SDRAM bit error
Main Board (MPR)

malfunction
of Main Board (MPR)
software
external factors
SOLUTION

Replace the Main Board (be sure to
replacing)
Installation Manual
413
Error Code
002
Error Message
System Restart
PROBABLE CAUSE
010
AC power down
SOLUTION
Reset Button is
pressed
Power failure
Main Board
malfunction
of Main Board software
external factors
Ignore if not frequent

replacing)
AC power down
Bad connection or
breaking of AC cord

properly
Check the AC cord
011
DC power down
AC power down
(Main Board)
malfunction
Detection of over
current (short circuit on
optional service cards)

properly
Check the AC cord
replacing)
Remove the optional service cards and
restart the Hybrid IP-PBX
012*
MPR RAM
battery low
Battery out
Main Board (MPR)
malfunction

replacing)
013
Additional AC
power down
Additional AC power
down
Bad connection or
breaking of additional
AC cord

See if the additional AC cord is
connected properly
Check the additional AC cord
Replace the additional AC cord (be
sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX
when replacing)
Defective cable
Defective ISDN
terminal equipment
malfunction: BRI
017
BRI port overload
414
Installation Manual
Check the cable

Replace the defective terminal
equipment
Check the number of connected
terminal equipment
service card
Error Code
Error Message
PROBABLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
019
Additional AC
power on
Additional AC power on
Bad connection or
breaking of additional
AC cord

See if the additional AC cord is
connected properly
Check the additional AC cord
Replace the additional AC cord (be
sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX
when replacing)
020*
SD file access
error
SD Memory Card
malfunction
Memory Card
Main Board
malfunction

replacing)
021*
SD Memory Card
disconnected
022
Not enough free

space on SD card
SD Memory Card not

installed
Memory Card
SD Memory Card
malfunction
Main Board
malfunction
Delete the files whose file names start

Not enough memory
with "$" from SD Memory Card
space available to save
the system data, or to
Note
upload system files
Do not delete the "PSMPR" file; it is the
from the KX-TDA30
programme file of the Main Board
Maintenance Console
(MPR).
Installation Manual
415
Error Code
Error Message
PROBABLE CAUSE
023
System data file

version error
024
System
initialization file
version error
025
Card initialization
file version error
026
LCD file version

error
027
System data file

checksum error
028
System
initialization file
checksum error
029
Card initialization
file checksum
error
030
LCD file
checksum error
031*
System data file

not found
032*
System
initialization file
not found
SOLUTION
Old system files on SD

Memory Card
Defective system files

on SD Memory Card
SD Memory Card not

installed
Memory Card
SD Memory Card
malfunction
Main Board
malfunction
Restore the backup files

Re-install the software

replacing)
033*
Card initialization
file not found
034*
LCD file not found
035
System data file

access error
036*
System
initialization file
access error
037*
Card initialization
file access error
038*
LCD file access

error
090
Over Card
Limitation
Too many optional
service cards installed
Reduce the number of optional service

cards
091*
PT connection
over
Too many PTs

connected
Reduce the number of PTs
092*
CS connection
over
Too many CSs

connected
Reduce the number of CSs
416
Installation Manual
Error Code
230*
Error Message
Card
disconnected
PROBABLE CAUSE

not installed properly
malfunction
Main Board
malfunction
SOLUTION
234
DPLL clock failure

malfunction: DLC, BRI,
IP-GW
Main Board (MPR)

malfunction
251
MSG DSP failure

malfunction: MSG
305*
Data Link failure
307
LAN No Carrier
308
IP-GW LAN Loop

back Error

service card
replacing)
service card
replacing)
service card

CS and Hybrid IP-PBX
failed

network and BRI/IPGW card failed
Check the connection between the CS

and Hybrid IP-PBX
network and BRI/IP-GW card
IP-GW card not

connected to the LAN

LAN and IP-GW card
Detection of IP-GW
LAN Loop back Test
error

service card
309
IP-GW Core Data

Link Error
Detection of IP-GW
Core data Link error

310*
Port Link Failure
Voice Processing
System malfunction
Ports defective on
optional service card:
DLC
Check the Voice Processing System

service card
Installation Manual
417
Error Code
320
321
Error Message
PROBABLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
IP-GW H.323
Dummy Call Test

Error
Detection of IP-GW
H.323 Dummy Call
Test error
IP-GW
Gatekeeper Error
Detection of
Gatekeeper access
error

service card
Check the IP address setting of

Gatekeeper
Check whether the Gatekeeper is
connected to the network and work
properly
Check the route to the Gatekeeper
322
IP-GW
Gatekeeper
Registration Error
Gatekeeper
Registration is failed
Check the Gatekeeper setting
323
IP-GW SDRAM
Failure
Detection of IP-GW
SDRAM error

service card
324
IP-GW DPRAM
Failure
Detection of IP-GW
DPRAM error

service card
325
IP-GW LAN Chip

Failure
Detection of IP-GW
LAN Chip failure

service card
IP-GW is stopped from

a remote maintenance
PC

is stopped from a remote maintenance
PC
IP-GW Rebooted
by Maintenance
Console
IP-GW is rebooted
from a remote
maintenance PC

is rebooted from a remote
maintenance PC
371
IP-GW Rebooted

malfunction: IP-GW
Check whether the software version of

the IP-GW card is correct
391
Data Link
established
Connection with PC
Phone/PC Console or
Voice Processing
System (DPT
Integration)
established or restored

connection with PC Phone/PC
Console or Voice Processing System
(DPT Integration) is established, and
does not indicate an error condition
that needs to be solved.
However, if this is logged frequently
(with "305 Data Link failure"), check the
connection as it may not be done
properly.
392
Clock master card

selected
Clock master card has

been changed to the
one indicated by the
sub code
Check if the proper card is selected as

the new clock master card
393
LAN Carrier
detected
IP-GW card connected

to the LAN

synchronisation of LAN is established
326
IP-GW Stop
370
418
Installation Manual
Error Code
Error Message
PROBABLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
394
IP-GW Core Data

Link established
IP-GW Core Data Link

established

Core Data Link is recovered
395
IP-GW
Gatekeeper Error
Cleared
Connection to the
Gatekeeper is
recovered

connection to the Gatekeeper is
recovered
396
IP-GW Run
IP-GW is started from a

remote maintenance
PC
510*
SMDR disconnect
RS-232C cable not

connected
Breaking of RS-232C
cable
Printer (terminal
equipment)
malfunction

is started from a remote maintenance
PC
Check the RS-232C cable
Check the terminal equipment
Installation Manual
419
420
Installation Manual
Section 9
Appendix
Installation Manual
421
9.1 Revision History
9.1
Revision History
9.1.1
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: Version 1.1
New Options
KX-TDA0105
KX-TDA0182
8-Port DID Card (DID8)
KX-TDA0183
KX-TDA0484
4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card (IP-GW4E)
KX-TDA0143
KX-TDA0141CE
2-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a DHLC/DLC Card (PTinterface CS) for DECT Portable Station
KX-TDA0141
2-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a DHLC/DLC Card (PTinterface CS) for 2.4 GHz Portable Station
New Contents
2.7.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection
Changed Contents
422
1.4.3 System Capacity
Installation Manual
9.1.2
KX-TDA30: Version 1.1
New Options
KX-TDA3183
KX-TDA3105
Changed Contents
5.4.3 System Capacity
Installation Manual
423
424
Installation Manual
Index
Installation Manual
425
Index
Numerics
16-Channel Echo Canceller Card (KX-TDA0166)
27, 125
16-Port Analogue Trunk Card (KX-TDA0181)
28, 75
16-Port Digital Extension Card (KX-TDA0172)
27, 113
16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card (KX-TDA0174)
27,
117
16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message Lamp Card (KX28, 117
TDA0175)
2-Channel Message Card (KX-TDA3191)
243, 307
243, 287
2-Port BRI Card (KX-TDA3280)
244, 289
2-Port Doorphone Card (German Type) (KX-TDA0162)
27, 122
2-Port Doorphone Card (German Type) (KX-TDA3162)
243, 303
4 Cell Station Interface Card (KX-TDA0143)
27, 106
4-Channel Message Card (KX-TDA0191)
28, 126
4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card (KX-TDA0480)
29, 101
29, 104
244, 292
28, 75
243, 285
28, 90
4-Port Caller ID Card (KX-TDA3193)
243, 288
243, 294
4-Port Doorphone Card (KX-TDA0161)
27, 120
4-Port Doorphone Card (KX-TDA3161)
243, 300
243,
296
8 Cell Station Interface Card (KX-TDA0144)
27, 106
8-Channel Echo Canceller Card (KX-TDA3166)
243, 306
28, 75
29, 90
8-Port Caller ID Card (KX-TDA0193)
28, 80
8-Port Caller ID/Pay Tone Card (KX-TDA0189)
28, 79
8-Port DID Card (KX-TDA0182)
28, 77
27, 111
243, 297
8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card (KX-TDA0170)
27, 108
8-Port E & M Trunk Card (KX-TDA0184)
28, 81
27,
115
243,
299
A
About the Other Manuals
11
AC Adaptor Capability
250
AC Adaptor Selection (With BRI Extension Port)
250
AC Adaptor Selection (Without BRI Extension Port)
249
Additional AC Adaptor (KX-A236)
244
After Site Survey
154, 180, 338, 361
Amphenol Connector Pin Assignment Chart
60
Appendix
421
Attaching a Ferrite Core
57
B
49, 263
Basic Shelf
24
Basic System Construction KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
Basic System Construction KX-TDA30
240
426
Installation Manual
24
Before Installation
38, 254
Before Installation KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
38
Before Installation KX-TDA30
254
Before Site Survey
146, 174, 330, 355
BRI2 Card
289
BRI4 and BRI8 Cards
90
22, 238
C
Calculation Example
249, 251
34
36
Changed Contents
422, 423
Characteristics
32, 247
CID/PAY8 Card
79
CID4 Card
288
CID8 Card
80
22, 238
204, 390
155, 181, 339,
362
Connection
207, 221, 393, 405
Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
166
Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations KX-TDA30
348
Connection of DECT Portable Stations KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
138
Connection of DECT Portable Stations KX-TDA30
322
Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers KX-TDA100/KX191
TDA200
Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers KX-TDA30
371
Connection of Extensions KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
129
Connection of Extensions KX-TDA30
313
Connection of Peripherals
194, 381
Connection of Peripherals KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
194
Connection of Peripherals KX-TDA30
381
Connection KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
207
Connection KX-TDA30
393
Construction of Basic Shelf
24
Construction of Main Unit
240
Covering the Blank Slots
52
CSIF4 and CSIF8 Card
106
CTI Link Card (KX-TDA0410)
29, 127
CTI-LINK Card
127
CTIFirst Party Call Control
137, 321
CTIThird Party Call Control
127, 197, 384
D
DHLC8 Card
108
DID8 Card
77
132, 316
Digital XDP
132, 316
DLC16 Card
113
DLC4 Card
294
DLC8 Card
111, 297
Door Opener
120, 122, 191, 300, 303, 371
Doorphone
120, 122, 191, 300, 303, 371
DPH2 Card
122, 303
DPH4 Card
120, 300
Index
E&M8 Card
81
E1 Card
87
E-1 Trunk Card (KX-TDA0188)
28, 87
ECHO16 Card
125
ECHO8 Card
306
EXT-CID Card
308
Extension Caller ID Card (KX-TDA3168)
243, 308
130, 132, 314, 316
KX-A236 (Additional AC Adaptor)

244
KX-TDA0103 (L-Type Power Supply Unit)
29, 44
KX-TDA0104 (M-Type Power Supply Unit)
29, 44
KX-TDA0105 (Memory Expansion Card)
27, 73
KX-TDA0108 (S-Type Power Supply Unit)
29, 44
KX-TDA0143 (4 Cell Station Interface Card)
27, 106
KX-TDA0144 (8 Cell Station Interface Card)
27, 106
KX-TDA0161 (4-Port Doorphone Card)
27, 120
KX-TDA0162 (2-Port Doorphone Card (German Type))
27, 122
KX-TDA0166 (16-Channel Echo Canceller Card)
27, 125
KX-TDA0170 (8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card)
27, 108
KX-TDA0171 (8-Port Digital Extension Card)
27, 111
27, 113
KX-TDA0173 (8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card)
27,
115
27,
117
KX-TDA0175 (16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message
28, 117
Lamp Card)
KX-TDA0180 (8-Port Analogue Trunk Card)
28, 75
28, 75
KX-TDA0182 (8-Port DID Card)
28, 77
28, 75
KX-TDA0184 (8-Port E & M Trunk Card)
28, 81
KX-TDA0187 (T-1 Trunk Card)
28, 84
KX-TDA0188 (E-1 Trunk Card)
28, 87
KX-TDA0189 (8-Port Caller ID/Pay Tone Card)
28, 79
KX-TDA0190 (Optional 3-Slot Base Card)
28, 119
KX-TDA0191 (4-Channel Message Card)
28, 126
KX-TDA0193 (8-Port Caller ID Card)
28, 80
KX-TDA0196 (Remote Card)
28, 74
KX-TDA0284 (4-Port BRI Card)
28, 90
29, 90
KX-TDA0290 (PRI Card [PRI23])
29, 98
KX-TDA0290CE/CJ (PRI Card [PRI30])
29, 94
KX-TDA0410 (CTI Link Card)
29, 127
KX-TDA0480 (4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card)
29, 101
29, 104
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: Version 1.1
422
KX-TDA30: Version 1.1
423
KX-TDA3105 (Memory Expansion Card)
243, 309
KX-TDA3161 (4-Port Doorphone Card)
243, 300
KX-TDA3162 (2-Port Doorphone Card (German Type))
243, 303
KX-TDA3166 (8-Channel Echo Canceller Card)
243, 306
KX-TDA3168 (Extension Caller ID Card)
243, 308
243, 294
243, 297
243,
296
243,
299
243, 285
243, 287
KX-TDA3191 (2-Channel Message Card)
243, 307
KX-TDA3193 (4-Port Caller ID Card)
243, 288
KX-TDA3196 (Remote Card)
244, 311
244, 289
244, 292
F
Fastening Amphenol Type Connector
59
137, 321
Floor Standing (KX-TDA200 Only)
65
48, 262
G
General Description
30, 245
Guide for the KX-TDA Maintenance Console KX-TDA100/KXTDA200
205
Guide for the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console KX-TDA30
391
H
53, 270
214, 400
215, 401
I
Installation of the Extension Cards KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
106
Installation of the Extension Cards KX-TDA30
294
Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
40
Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30
256
Installation of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console KX-TDA100/KXTDA200
209
Installation of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console
395
Installation of the Main Processing Card KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
71
Installation of the Other Cards KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
119
Installation of the Other Cards KX-TDA30
300
Installation of the SD Memory Card
261
Installation of the Trunk Cards KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
75
Installation of the Trunk Cards KX-TDA30
285
38, 254
Installation KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
37
Installation KX-TDA30
253
Installing and Starting the KX-TDA Maintenance Console
209
Installing and Starting the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console
395
Installing the KX-TDA Maintenance Console and Selecting Appropriate
Country/Area Data
210
Installing the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console and Selecting Appropri396
ate Country/Area Data
50, 264
Installing/Replacing the Power Supply Unit
44
IP-GW4 Card
101, 292
IP-GW4E Card
104
Installation Manual
427
Index
LCOT2 Card
287
LCOT4 Card
285
LCOT4, LCOT8, and LCOT16 Cards
75
Lightning Protector Installation
68, 282
L-Type Power Supply Unit (KX-TDA0103)
29, 44

68, 282
Remote Card (KX-TDA0196)
28, 74
Remote Card (KX-TDA3196)
244, 311
Removing/Attaching the Front Cover
259
Revision History
422
RF Specification
138, 322
RMT Card
74, 311
M
Main Unit
240
Maximum Cabling Distances of the Extension Wiring (Twisted Cable)
129, 313
33, 248
Maximum Trunk and Extension Cards
33
Maximum Trunk and VoIP Line
248
MEC Card
73, 309
34, 249
Memory Expansion Card (KX-TDA0105)
27, 73
Memory Expansion Card (KX-TDA3105)
243, 309
MPR Card
71
MSG2 Card
307
MSG4 Card
126
M-Type Power Supply Unit (KX-TDA0104)
29, 44
N
Names and Locations
41, 257
Networking Features
22, 238
New Contents
422
New Options
422, 423
O
OPB3 Card
119
Opening/Closing the Covers
258
Opening/Closing the Front Cover
42
Operation
223, 407
Optional 3-Slot Base Card (KX-TDA0190)
28, 119
Options
27, 243
Options KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
27
Options KX-TDA30
243
Overview
138, 166, 206, 322, 348, 392
Overview KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
206
Overview KX-TDA30
392
P
130, 314
Parallel Mode
130, 132, 314, 316
23, 239
Password Security
209, 395
23, 239
23, 239
Power Failure Connections
198, 385
Power Failure Connections KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
Power Failure Connections KX-TDA30
385
Power Supply Unit Selection
35
PRI Card (PRI23) (KX-TDA0290)
29, 98
PRI Card (PRI30) (KX-TDA0290CE/CJ)
29, 94
PRI23 Card
98
PRI30 Card
94
Procedure Overview
140, 168, 324, 349
428
Installation Manual
S
38, 254
Safety Instructions
44
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
6
SD Memory Card
71, 261
Site Planning
142, 170, 326, 351
Site Survey
176, 357
150, 334
SLC16 and MSLC16 Cards
117
SLC4 Card
296
SLC8 Card
115, 299
Slot Position
264
Slot Restrictions
264
Specifications KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
30
Specifications KX-TDA30
245
Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX
202, 387
Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
202
Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30
387
Starting the KX-TDA Maintenance Console and Assigning the Basic
210
Items (Quick Setup)
Starting the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console and Assigning the Basic
Items (Quick Setup)
396
Structure of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console
213
Structure of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console
399
S-Type Power Supply Unit (KX-TDA0108)
29, 44
System Capacity
33, 248
2
3
25, 241
System Highlights
22, 238
System Highlights KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
22
System Highlights KX-TDA30
238
System Outline KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
21
System Outline KX-TDA30
237
198
T1 Card
84
T-1 Trunk Card (KX-TDA0187)
28, 84
The Structure of this Manual
11
227, 411
403, 404
Turning off the Hybrid IP-PBX
390
Types of Connectors
55, 274
U
Unpacking
40, 256
Using a CSIF Card
155, 181
156, 182
219, 220
Index

130, 132, 134, 314, 316, 318
131, 315
225, 409
V
Voice Mail Features
22, 238
W
Wall Mounting (AC Adaptor)
279
Wall Mounting (CS)
164, 189, 346, 369
63
61
276
Wiring Precautions
38, 254
Installation Manual
429
Index
430
Installation Manual
Install a
screw here.
120 mm
Install a
screw here.
240 mm
250 mm
130 mm
65 mm
Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.

1-62, 4-chome, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan
Copyright:
This manual is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. (PCC). You may print out this manual
solely for internal use with this model. Except above, you may not reproduce this manual in any form, in
whole or part, without the prior written consent of PCC.
2003 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
PSQX2633WA KK0103AH4034

Install Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Install Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hybrid IP-PBX

Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX, KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200.

Main Processing Card

Main Processing Card (MPR)

Memory Expansion Card (MEC)

Remote Card (RMT)

8-Port Analogue Trunk Card (LCOT8)

16-Port Analogue Trunk Card (LCOT16)

8-Port DID Card (DID8)

4-Port Analogue Trunk Card (LCOT4)

8-Port E & M Trunk Card (E&M8)

T-1 Trunk Card (T1)

E-1 Trunk Card (E1)

8-Port Caller ID/Pay Tone Card (CID/PAY8)

8-Port Caller ID Card (CID8)

4-Port BRI Card (BRI4)

8-Port BRI Card (BRI8)

PRI Card (PRI30)

PRI Card (PRI23)

4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card (IP-GW4)

4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card (IP-GW4E)

4 Cell Station Interface Card (CSIF4)

8 Cell Station Interface Card (CSIF8)

8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card (DHLC8)

8-Port Digital Extension Card (DLC8)

16-Port Digital Extension Card (DLC16)

8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card (SLC8)

16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card (SLC16)

16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message

System Components Table for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Power Supply Units

Cell Stations (CSs)

4-Port Doorphone Card (DPH4)

2-Port Doorphone Card (German Type) (DPH2)

16-Channel Echo Canceller Card (ECHO16)

Optional 3-Slot Base Card (OPB3)

4-Channel Message Card (MSG4)

CTI Link Card (CTI-LINK)

L-Type Power Supply Unit (PSU-L)

M-Type Power Supply Unit (PSU-M)

S-Type Power Supply Unit (PSU-S)

2-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a DHLC/DLC Card

2-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a DHLC/DLC Card

4-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a CSIF Card for DECT

3-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a CSIF Card for 2.4

Proprietary Equipment KX-A228

S/M-type Back-up Battery Cable

L-type Back-up Battery Cable

Blank Slot Cover

System Components Table for KX-TDA30

4-Port Analogue Trunk Card (LCOT4)

2-Port Analogue Trunk Card (LCOT2)

4-Port Caller ID Card (CID4)

2-Port BRI Card (BRI2)

4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card (IP-GW4)

4-Port Digital Extension Card (DLC4)

8-Port Digital Extension Card (DLC8)

4-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card (SLC4)

8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card (SLC8)

System Components Table for KX-TDA30

Cell Stations (CSs)

Memory Expansion Card (MEC)

4-Port Doorphone Card (DPH4)

2-Port Doorphone Card (German Type) (DPH2)